JP7125597B2 - pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a pachinko game machine.

A pachinko game machine generally acquires a random number for a lottery upon entry of a game ball into a starting hole, and temporarily stores the random number as an operation pending ball up to a predetermined upper limit number. Each time a predetermined starting condition is established, such operation-reserving balls are successively consumed one by one, and a determination is made as to whether or not the game corresponds to a big hit. When the result of winning/failure determination is a big hit, after variably displaying the decorative patterns consisting of a plurality of rows, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode, and the big winning port which is normally closed is opened. A special game (jackpot game) to be in the state is established.

Pachinko game machines of this type are known to have a large number of variation patterns in order to increase variations such as ready-to-win effects and pseudo-continuous effects (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714

Since there are already many pachinko gaming machines adopting such a configuration as conventional models, it is necessary to further improve the amusement of the games in order to differentiate them from the conventional models.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a pachinko game machine capable of improving the amusement of a game.

In order to achieve such an object, the pachinko game machine according to the present invention includes a game board having a game area formed thereon, a start opening provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball entering the start opening. Random number acquisition means for acquiring a predetermined random number value triggered by the entry of a game ball, and success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on the success/failure random number value among the predetermined random number values acquired by the random number acquisition means. , variation pattern determination means for performing a main variation pattern lottery to determine a main variation pattern based on the main variation pattern random number value among the predetermined random values acquired by the random number acquisition means; Based on the main variation pattern, a symbol display device that variably displays and stop-displays the special symbols indicating the result of the success/failure determination, and a transition to a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the success/failure determination results in a big hit. a special game executing means to obtain a predetermined random number obtained by the random number acquiring means; a performance display device for displaying a predetermined performance; A main variation addition pattern lottery for determining the main variation addition pattern is performed based on the main variation addition pattern random number value, the basic variation time of the special symbol is specified by the main variation pattern, and the special symbol is selected by the main variation addition pattern. The fluctuation addition time is specified, and the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is the total time of the basic fluctuation time of the special symbol specified by the main fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation addition time of the special symbol specified by the main fluctuation addition pattern. During the variable display of the special symbols corresponding to the determined main variation pattern and the main variation additional pattern, a special effect corresponding to the main variation additional pattern is executed, and a predetermined main variation Selection candidates for a plurality of types of ready-to-win effects are associated with the pattern, and one of the special effects having a plurality of types of display modes can be executed according to the type of the main variation addition pattern. It is configured so that a reach performance corresponding to the display mode of the special performance can be executed, and the main variation pattern determined in the main variation pattern lottery and the main variation addition pattern determined in the main variation addition pattern lottery. A sub-variation pattern and a sub-variation addition pattern corresponding to the combination are determined, and a performance corresponding to the sub-variation pattern and the sub-variation addition pattern is performed. A plurality of sub-variation patterns are associated with a certain main variation pattern and/or a certain main variation additional pattern, and one sub-variation pattern out of the plurality of sub-variation patterns can be executed. A plurality of sub-variation addition patterns are associated with a certain main variation pattern and/or a certain main variation addition pattern, and one of the plurality of sub-variation addition patterns is determined. It is characterized in that it is configured to

According to the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine. It is a control block diagram of the pachinko game machine. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and effect control board of the pachinko game machine. It is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol success or failure lottery table. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. It is a transition diagram of the game state and production mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows a game state setting table. It is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection state table. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 1; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 2; FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 3; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 4; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 5; FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 6; FIG. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the configuration of the variable addition effect. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between a main variation pattern, a main variation addition table, and a main variation addition pattern; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram for explaining a main variation addition pattern; It is a schematic diagram showing a sub-fluctuation pattern table (for loss). It is a schematic diagram showing a sub-fluctuation pattern table (for big hits). FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a sub-variation addition pattern table (1 for error); FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a sub-variation addition pattern table (for error 2); It is a schematic diagram showing a sub-fluctuation addition pattern table (1 for big hit). It is a schematic diagram showing a sub-fluctuation addition pattern table (2 for big hit). It is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen of the variable addition effect. (A) is a schematic diagram of a friend participation effect pattern table, (B) is a schematic diagram of an aura connection effect pattern table, and (C) is a schematic view of an aura use effect pattern table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of a companion participation production and an aura connection production. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of an aura use effect; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a pseudo-continuous effect. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram for explaining another characteristic configuration 1 of the variable addition effect; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram for explaining another characteristic configuration 2 of the variable addition effect; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram for explaining a pending image display area and a changing image display area; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a suspended image and a changing image in normal mode; It is a schematic diagram which shows the pending|holding change look-ahead lottery table of normal mode. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a hold change pattern table (first hold) in normal mode; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a hold change pattern table (second hold) in normal mode; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a hold change pattern table (third hold) in normal mode; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a hold change pattern table (fourth hold) in normal mode; It is a schematic diagram which shows the pending|holding image and the image during a fluctuation|variation of suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the holding|maintenance change look-ahead lottery table of suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram showing a hold change pattern table (first hold) in the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram showing a hold change pattern table (second hold) in the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram showing a pending change pattern table (third pending) in the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the suspension change pattern table (holding 4th) of suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the pending|holding change production|presentation of suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram showing a production example of a special hold change production of suppression chance mode. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a suspended image and a changing image in a normal mode according to Modification 1; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram conceptually showing the layer structure of the effect display device of Modification 1; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a production of a hold change production in a normal mode of Modification 1; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a held image and a changing image in normal mode of modification 2; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing operation display of a suspended image and a changing image in a normal mode of Modification 2; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a performance of a hold change performance in a normal mode of Modification 2; It is a schematic diagram which shows the production|presentation flow of a battle production|presentation. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the basic screen of the battle effect, (B) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the internal numerical value of the meter counter and the level of the meter image, and (C) is the timing of meter update and the upper limit of the internal numerical value. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence with a value. It is a schematic diagram showing the operation effective period of the effect button in the Gento Rush mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production|presentation flow of suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic screen of suppression chance mode. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic diagram for explaining a base suppression effect table (progress pattern); It is a schematic diagram showing a lottery table of base suppression effect. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect of the remaining number of times notification effect and the mode branching effect. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a time chart of a standby demonstration effect; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control side; FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing control processing following FIG. 62 of the main processing on the main control side; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening monitor control processing. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start monitoring control process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start monitoring process. It is a flow chart which shows special design control processing. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol control general-purpose process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process. It is a flow chart showing processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flow chart showing processing during special symbol stop symbol display. It is a flow chart showing a special electric accessary product control process. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing control processing following FIG. 74 of the special electric accessary product control processing. 8 is a flowchart showing reset start processing; It is a flow chart which shows production control side main processing. 4 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing; It is a flow chart which shows production control command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control side timer interrupt processing. 9 is a flowchart showing image control command transmission interrupt processing;

Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

1 and 2 show a front view and a rear view of the pachinko game machine PM according to the present embodiment. First, with reference to these figures, an overview of the overall configuration of the pachinko game machine PM will be given. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment is a model in which two functions corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and the first game (first special symbol game) and the second A game (second special symbol game) can be developed.

<Basic Configuration of Pachinko Machines>
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PM (also referred to simply as "game machine PM") has an outer frame 1, which is a vertically oriented fixed holding frame configured in the size of an outer rectangular frame. A front frame 2, which is constructed in the size of a rectangular frame and forms an opening and closing mounting frame, is attached to the front right edge by an upper and lower hinge mechanism 3 arranged on the left edge of the front so that it can be horizontally opened, opened, and detached. The outer frame 1 is always kept in a closed state in which it is engaged and connected by using a locking device 4 called a double lock.

A rectangular glass frame 5 that fits the upper front area of the front frame 2 is attached to the front frame 2 so that it can be horizontally opened, opened, and detached by using the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3, and a locking device 4 is used. It is always held in a closed state covering the front surface of the front frame 2.例文帳に追加A game board 20 is detachably set and held on the front frame 2, and the game area PA in front of the game board 20 is visible through the multi-layered glass of the glass frame 5 which is always closed and held. there is

On the front side of the glass frame 5, there are provided a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light according to the progress of the game, and a speaker 11 that produces sound effects according to the development of the game. Upper and lower ball trays (upper ball tray 8 and lower ball tray 9) for storing game balls are provided in the lower part of the glass frame 5, and the front center of the upper ball tray 8 is pressed by the player. A button (effect switch) 15 is provided, and a shooting handle 12 for shooting game balls is provided on the front right side of the lower ball tray 9 . Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the operation input means for effecting will be referred to as "effect button 15". cross-shaped switch (cross-key, cross-shaped button), tilt-operated lever-type switch, rotary-operated dial switch, proximity switch that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches it, touch sensor , touch panel, etc., the concept includes all operation input means.

The game board 20 is configured with a substrate formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, or an ABS resin as a base. On the front surface of the game board 20, an outer rail 41 and an inner rail 42 are fixed in an arc shape to define a substantially circular game area PA in which game balls can roll. In addition, a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the game area PA is formed by the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42, and the position near the exit opening of the game ball in this guide passage (the position of the inner rail 42) A ball return prevention valve 43 is disposed at the tip portion) to prevent the game ball discharged into the game area PA from the outlet opening from returning to the guide passage again. In this game area PA, along with a windmill and a large number of game nails, there are various types of openings such as a first starting opening 51, a second starting opening 52, an operating gate 53, a big winning opening 54, and general winning openings 61, 62, 63, 64. In addition to the winning opening, the first special design display device 71, the second special design display device 72, the first special design reservation lamp 73, the second special design reservation lamp 74, the normal design display device 75, the general design reservation lamp 76, etc. Various displays are provided. A center decoration 21 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the performance display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the center opening of the center decoration 21.例文帳に追加

The game area PA is based on the center decoration 21 in the center, and includes a left area PA1 that is the area on the left side of the center decoration 21 (board area corresponding to left-handed hitting) and an area on the right side of the center decoration 21 (corresponding to right-handed hitting). and a right side area PA2 which is a board surface area). A top plate portion 22 is integrally formed on the upper portion of the center ornament 21 and faces the outer rail 41 in a substantially vertical direction. A communication passage 44 is formed through which a game ball can pass to the right area PA2. In this embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 can enter either the first starting hole 51 or the general winning holes 61 to 63, which are mainly arranged below the center decoration 21. On the other hand, game balls flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter any one of the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the big winning opening 54, which are mainly arranged on the right side of the center decoration 21. is. At the lower end of the game area PA, an out port 29 is provided for discharging the game balls that have rolled down without entering the winning holes to the back side of the game board 20.例文帳に追加Hereinafter, each component provided on the game board 20 will be described in order.

The first starting port 51 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first starting port switch 511 for detecting the entry of game balls. The first starting port 51 is a normally open winning port that is open upward, and mainly allows game balls (left-handed game balls) flowing down the left side area PA1 to enter. The entry of the game ball into the first starting port 51 triggers the first special symbol lottery. In addition, in the present embodiment, a special symbol that is variably displayed or stopped on the first special symbol display device 71 is referred to as a "first special symbol".

The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second special symbol game, and has a second starting port switch 521 for detecting the entry of the game ball. The second starting port 51 is arranged in the right area PA2, which is a board area corresponding to hitting to the right, and mainly game balls flowing down the right area PA2 (game balls hit to the right) can enter. The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 triggers the second special symbol lottery. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbol that is variably displayed or stopped on the second special symbol display device 72 is referred to as a "second special symbol". The second starting port 52 includes a normal electric accessory 522 generally called an electric chew, and a normal electric accessory solenoid 523 for opening and closing the normal electric accessory 522 . The normal electric accessary 522 is variable between an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter into the second starting port 52 . That is, the normal electric accessory 522 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 unless it is displaced to the open state, and at a predetermined opportunity (a chance to win the normal symbol lottery) described later. In the open state, the ease of entering a game ball increases. This ordinary electric accessory 522 has a front-rear slide type movable member 524 for opening and closing the second starting port 52 . The movable member 524 has a closed position (protruding position) that closes the second starting port 52 to make it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball, and a closed position (protruding position) that opens the second starting port 52 to allow the entering of the game ball. It is slidable in the front-rear direction (direction orthogonal to the board surface) between an open position (retracted position) that makes it easier. The upper surface of the movable member 524 has a passage width of about one game ball or more in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to slope down from the right side to the left side in a front view. Therefore, when the movable member 524 is in the closed position (when the second starting port 52 is in the closed state), the game ball can flow down the upper surface of the movable member 524 as a guide path, and from the right to the left on the guide path. It flows downward and falls from the left end of the normal electric accessory 522 .

The operation gate 53 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the normal symbol game, and has an operation gate switch 531 for detecting passage of game balls. In addition, passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 serves as a trigger for a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not the second starting port 52 is to be opened.

The big winning opening 54 is formed as a horizontally rectangular winning opening that is opened when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big win or a small win. The big winning opening 54 includes a big winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a big winning opening for driving the special electric accessory 542 to open and close. A solenoid 543 is provided. The special electric accessory 542 changes between an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter into the big winning opening 54 . In this example, the big winning opening 54 is provided in the right area PA2 in the game area PA. Therefore, in the special game (big win game, small win game), when the game ball is shot, it can be easily entered into the big winning hole 54 by hitting the right side area PA2, i.e. hitting the right side. It's becoming

The general winning holes 61 to 63 are arranged in the left side area PA1, which is a board area corresponding to left-handed hitting, and game balls flowing down the left side area PA1 can enter. The general winning openings 61 to 63 are provided with a left general winning opening switch 611 for detecting entry of game balls. This left general winning hole switch 611 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) for the three general winning holes 61 to 63 from the viewpoint of cost reduction, etc. Incoming balls can also be detected.

The general winning hole 64 is arranged in the right side area PA2, which is a board area corresponding to hitting to the right, and a game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter. The general winning opening 64 has a right general winning opening switch 641 for detecting the entry of a game ball. It should be noted that the entry of a game ball into each of the general winning openings 61 to 64 does not trigger the lottery of special symbols or ordinary symbols, but like the other winning openings (except for the operation gate 53), it gives the opportunity to win prize balls. becomes.

The first special symbol display device 71 performs variable display and fixed display of the first special symbol when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 51 as a trigger. This first special symbol display device 71 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variable display of the first special symbol is represented according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp stops and switches to lighting display. , the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed.

The second special symbol display device 72 performs variable display and fixed display of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second starting port 52 . The second special symbol display device 72 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variable display of the second special symbol is represented according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp stops and switches to lighting display. , the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed.

The 1st special figure reservation lamp 73 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 74 are each composed of, for example, two LED lamps. (up to 4 of each). The number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is a number related to the random number obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 51 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the jackpot game. , indicating the number of times that the obtained random number is suspended, that is, the success/failure determination is temporarily suspended until the success/failure determination permission condition (fluctuation start condition) is satisfied for the obtained random value. In the same way, the number of activated balls of the second special symbol is a random value acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 52 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the big hit game. This number indicates the number of times that the obtained random number value is suspended, that is, the success/failure determination is temporarily suspended until the success/failure determination permission condition (fluctuation start condition) is satisfied for the obtained random value. there is

The normal symbol display device 75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs variable display and fixed display of normal symbols. The normal design reservation lamp 76 is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the number of lamps lit corresponds to the number of normal design fluctuations reserved (the number of normal design fluctuations that have not yet been executed). In addition, on the left side of the normal symbol display device 75, a round indicator 77 for displaying the number of round games (unit games) in the jackpot game (the number of rounds: the number of times the special electric accessory 542 operates continuously) is provided. ing.

The effect display device 70 mainly includes a variable effect of a decorative pattern that is variably displayed/stopped in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and an effect including a notice effect that suggests or notifies the expectation of a big hit in advance. An image is displayed, and a suspension display corresponding to the operation suspension ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, a decorative pattern display area 700 in which variable display of decorative patterns, advance notice effect display, etc. are executed, a first special figure reservation lamp 73 and a second special figure reservation lamp 74 A suspended image display area 710 in which the suspended image of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in synchronization with, and a varying image display area 720 in which the varying image corresponding to the varying display is displayed are provided. there is In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the rendering display device 70 . In the decorative pattern display section 700, three rows of display regions (left pattern display region Z1, middle pattern display region Z2, right pattern display region Z3), which are variable display regions of decorative patterns, are arranged on a predetermined effective line (not shown). ) are provided, the left pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the left pattern display region Z1, the middle pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the middle pattern display region Z2, and the right side of the decorative pattern corresponding to the right pattern display region Z3. Each pattern is stopped and displayed. The reserved image display section 710 displays a reserved image (a reserved icon) corresponding to the first special symbol actuation reserved ball and a reserved image (a reserved icon) corresponding to the second special symbol actuation reserved ball. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence (ball entry order) of the operation reserved balls of the special symbols. Display is possible. Further, in the changing image display area 720, a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the change display currently being executed is displayed.

The center decoration 21 is installed around the performance display device 70, and has functions such as the flow path of game balls, the protection of the performance screen, and the decoration. The center decoration 21 is provided with a movable accessory 24 for executing a performance action according to the development of the game. The movable accessory 24 is configured with a motor M (for example, a stepping motor) as a drive source. In addition, the game board 20 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light according to the progress of the game. In the following description, for convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25 are also collectively referred to as "effect lamp LP".

Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko game machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. On the rear side of the front frame 2, a rear set board 30 is provided on the upper and lower sides of the base frame body formed in a rectangular frame shape which is slightly smaller than the front frame 2 and which has a front-to-rear communication window in the center. It is connected to the rear side of the front frame 2 via a hinge mechanism 3 so that it can be horizontally opened, opened, and detached. A back set cover 30C having a rectangular box shape with an open front is detachably attached to the back set board 30, and is always arranged to cover the back side of the game board 20 attached to the front frame 2.例文帳に追加(The main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the image control board 300, which will be described later, are thereby covered with the back set cover 30C).

Each part of the back set board 30 includes a storage tank 31 that stores a large number of game balls, a tank rail 32 that extends rightward from the storage tank 31 with a gentle downward slope, and a right end of the tank rail 32 that connects downward. a ball supply passage portion 33 extending to the upper ball tray 6; A ball passage portion 35 and the like are provided.

On the back side of the game board 10, there are a main control board 100 that controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine PM, an effect control board 200 that controls all effects, an image display corresponding to the game development, and control of sound effects. An image control board 300 for performing image processing is attached. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board 30, there is a payout control board 400 for controlling the shooting and payout of game balls, and power is received from the game facility side and supplied to various control boards and electric/electronic parts. A power supply board 500 for outputting an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the game machine PM, and an external information terminal board 600 (see FIG. 3) are attached. In addition, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are placed in predetermined positions on the back of the game board 20 or the back of the back set board 30 in an assembly state housed in a board case made of transparent resin having a crimping structure and a sealing structure. are placed. These control boards and electric/electronic parts of each part of the pachinko game machine PM are connected to each other via harnesses (connector cables), and the pachinko game machine PM is configured to be operable.

<Pachinko game machine control configuration>
Next, with additional reference to FIG. 3, each control board installed in the pachinko game machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing the control configuration of the pachinko game machine PM.

The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processing related to games, a ROM 102 that stores control programs and various data, a RAM 103 that functions as a temporary storage area and a work area and a buffer memory, peripheral boards and various Equipped with a main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 configured with an I/O port circuit 104 for inputting and outputting signals between devices, and the main CPU 101 performs games according to the control program stored in the ROM 102. It is configured to perform the main controls relating to progression. In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 includes a clock circuit that divides a clock signal from a crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and resets when the main CPU 101 malfunctions or runs out of control. A WDT circuit that returns to a normal state, a CTC circuit that enables real-time interrupt generation and time measurement, and a program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101 operate as a separate system to generate a predetermined random number (internal random number). A random number generation circuit is installed, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The main CPU 101 reads various control programs stored in the ROM 102 based on detection information from each switch and performs arithmetic processing, thereby executing various processes related to the main control of the game. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile memory backed up by backup power generated in the power supply board 500 . The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing the data such as the stack pointer and each register held at the time of power failure when the power is turned off. ), the state of the game machine is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information in the backup area.

In addition, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the first start switch 511, the second start switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the big win switch 541, the left general win switch 611, the right general win switch 641, and the like. , and inputs detection signals from various switches to the main CPU 101 via the I/O port circuit 104 . In addition, the main control board 100 includes a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol reservation lamp 73, a second special symbol reservation lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75 and a general symbol reservation lamp. 76, and also electrically connected to the normal electric accessory solenoid 523 and the special electric accessory solenoid 543, and various control signals from the main CPU 101 are received via the I/O port circuit 104. Send to display means and various solenoids. The main control board 100 is also electrically connected to the external information terminal board 600 and transmits game information signals from the main CPU 101 to the external terminal board 600 via the I/O port 104 . This external information terminal board 600 transmits various external information signals to an external device (data display, hall computer, etc.) installed outside the game machine PM based on the game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100. Send. The game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100 may be input to the external information terminal board 600 via the payout control board 300, for example.

The main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communicate only in a single direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. It is possible to connect, and various production control commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the production control board 200. - 特許庁Data cannot be transmitted from the performance control board 200 to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 cannot be requested to transmit data.

The performance control board 200 includes a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processing related to game performance based on the performance control command from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores performance control programs and various data, etc., a work area that serves as a temporary storage area, Equipped with an effect control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 configured with a RAM 203 that functions as a buffer memory and an I/O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and devices. A sub-main CPU 201 is configured to execute main control relating to game effects according to a control program stored in a ROM 202 . In addition, although not shown, the effect control board 200 includes a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and a reset when the sub-main CPU 201 malfunctions or runs out of control. A WDT circuit that returns to a normal state using the system clock, a TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, an interrupt controller that activates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit, and a serial data input/output circuit. A serial communication circuit and the like are mounted, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

Effect control board 200, in the effect control processing based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, the image control command for instructing the image and sound to the image control board 300, the lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 91 (lamp data), drive control signals (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like. The production control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so that two-way communication is possible. A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been successfully received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200 .

In addition, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 equipped with a plurality of LED drivers, and transmits a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 via a serial communication circuit. Send. In this example, the effect control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 employ clock synchronous serial communication, and are transmitted via a signal line (clock line) separate from the data line for transmitting the lamp data. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit through the data line in synchronization with the clock signal. The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions upon receiving a lamp control signal for driving the LED transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches on/off the switch in the circuit based on this lamp control signal. By supplying or cutting off the drive current to the production lamp LP, control is performed to turn on or off the production lamp LP.

Furthermore, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a plurality of motor drivers 92, and sends drive control signals (driving data) for controlling the motor drivers 92 to the motor drivers 92 via the I/O port circuit 204. Send. The motor driver 92 supplies drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory 24 by switching on/off the switch in the circuit based on the drive control signal for driving the accessory transmitted from the performance control board 200. Alternatively, it is cut off to control each movable accessory 24 to operate. Data transmission to the motor driver 92 employs a parallel communication method.

The image control board 300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processing related to image effects based on image control commands from the effect control board 200, a ROM 302 that stores image control programs and various data, and a work area that serves as a temporary storage area. and an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310 configured with a RAM 303 functioning as a buffer memory and an I/O port circuit 304 for inputting/outputting signals between peripheral boards and devices. , the sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute the main control relating to the image rendering according to the control program stored in the ROM 302 . In addition, although not shown, the image control board 300 includes a VDP that generates image data according to the content of the effect based on the control signal obtained from the sub-sub CPU 301, and a It is equipped with a sound source IC that generates acoustic data. The VDP is a so-called image processor, which reads image data stored in the image ROM according to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, processes the image data, and transmits a generated video signal (image data) to the effect display device. This VDP is connected to a high-speed VRAM used for developing and processing image data read out from the image ROM. The sound source IC reads sound data stored in the sound ROM according to instructions from the sub-sub CPU 301, and outputs sound data generated by synthesizing the sound data to the speaker 11 via an amplifier (digital amplifier).

The payout control board 400 is mainly composed of a payout CPU 401 , a ROM 402 and a RAM 403 . The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be capable of two-way communication, and controls the prize ball payout unit 34 based on the payout control command from the main control board 100 to pay out the prize balls. is executed, and the ball feeding mechanism 13 and the shooting mechanism 14 are synchronously driven based on the operation amount of the shooting handle 12 to control the shooting of the game ball.

Although not shown in detail, the power supply board 500 includes a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used by each control board based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply equipment of the game island, and a backup power supply. and a power failure monitoring circuit for monitoring power failure due to voltage drop. supply. A power switch for activating the power circuit is connected to the power board 500, and on the premise that primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, when the power switch is turned on, the power board Predetermined power is supplied from a normal power supply circuit 500 to each control board and the like. The power supply board 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device of the game island has been cut off. , effect control board 200 and payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is charged when power is supplied to the pachinko game machine PM from the power supply of the game island. In addition, a RAM clear switch (not shown) is connected to the power board 500 for temporarily erasing the temporary storage contents of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting initial values when the pachinko game machine PM is powered on. ing. The RAM clear switch may be configured to be connected to the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 500, for example.

The external information terminal board 600 outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine PM based on the game information signal from the main control board 100 . External information signals output from the external information terminal board 600 as external information to an external device outside the machine include, for example, a jackpot signal, a consecutive game signal, a pattern determination signal, a winning ball signal, a door frame opening signal, and a magnetic sensor abnormality signal. , disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality signal, abnormality sensor detection (ball passing time abnormality, etc.) signal, etc., but since they are known techniques, descriptions thereof will be omitted below. Also, the external devices installed outside the game machine PM include a data display, a hall computer, and the like. The data display is a device that is installed above the gaming machine PM and displays data (game information) regarding the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display serves as useful judgment material for the player to select a gaming machine. The hall computer aggregates the operating states of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on external information signals output from each gaming machine installed in the hall of the amusement arcade, It is a device that manages the operating status of the machine. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via the data display or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without the data display.

<Basic operation of pachinko machine>
The pachinko game machine PM configured as described above is used for games in a state in which the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the game island of the game facility, and the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, etc. are closed and locked. A game is started by storing game balls in the tray 8 and rotating the shooting handle 12.例文帳に追加When the shooting handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 8 are delivered one by one to the shooting mechanism 14 by the ball feeding mechanism 13 disposed on the back side of the glass frame 5. The shooting mechanism 14 shoots out to the game area PA. At this time, when the shooting handle 12 is operated by less than the predetermined amount, the game ball does not reach the right side area PA2 and flows down the left side area PA1. In this left area PA1, a left flow path is formed for flowing down the game ball toward the first starting opening 51 and the general winning openings 61-63. On the other hand, when the shooting handle 12 is operated by a predetermined amount or more, the game ball reaches the right side area PA2 and flows down the right side area PA2. In this right area PA2, a right flow path for flowing down the game ball toward the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the big winning opening 54 is formed. Thus, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 or the right side area PA2 is divided into the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, and the operation gate 53 according to the route distributed in the left side region PA1 or the right side region PA1. , the special winning opening 54, and the general winning openings 61 to 64. If the ball does not enter any of the winning openings, the ball flows down to the out opening 29.例文帳に追加

When the game ball flowing down the game area PA enters one of the first starting hole 51, the second starting hole 52, the big winning hole 54, and the general winning holes 61 to 63, a prize corresponding to the type of the winning hole is awarded. A ball is put out to an upper ball tray 8 or a lower ball tray 9 by a prize ball putting out unit 34. - 特許庁In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when one game ball enters each winning hole (referred to as "unit number of prize balls") is "4" for the first start hole 51, and "4" for the second start hole. The starter opening 52 is set to "1", the general winning openings 61 to 64 are set to "3", and the big winning opening 54 is set to "15". Note that the number of unit prize balls for each winning hole is not limited to the one exemplified in the present embodiment, and other unit number of prize balls may be applied. For example, as the number of unit prize balls, the first starting hole 51 is "4", the second starting hole 52 is "3", the general winning holes 61 to 64 are "5", and the big winning hole is "10". and so on.

When the game ball enters the first start port 51 or the second start port 52, the lottery random number value of the special symbol is obtained, and the random number value is temporarily stored up to a predetermined upper limit number as the operation reserve ball of the special symbol. Then, when a predetermined start condition (variation start condition for a special symbol, which will be described later) is established, the determination of whether the special symbol is appropriate, the symbol determination, and the variation pattern determination are performed with respect to the lottery random number value related to the first ball to be activated. , In a manner corresponding to the determination result, the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the performance display device 70. The variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is synchronously stopped and displayed after the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern has elapsed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fixedly displayed in a stop mode indicating a big win, the game shifts to a special game (big win game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In each round game (unit game) of this jackpot game, an opening/closing operation is performed to change the big winning opening 54 to an open state only once or a plurality of times. When a prescribed count number of game balls enter the big winning opening 54, or when the opening time of the big winning opening 54 reaches the opening limit time, the round game being executed ends. Here, the mode of stopping the decorative symbols indicating the big hit is, for example, a mode in which the types of the three symbols are the same. In this embodiment, when the special symbols and decorative symbols are fixedly displayed in the stop mode indicating the big win, a plurality of round games (unit games) are executed as the big win game.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined jackpot is won, the special symbol probability variation function may operate from after the jackpot game ends until the number of special symbol variations reaches a predetermined terminal number. When the special pattern probability variation function is activated, the special pattern lottery jackpot probability shifts from a normal low probability state to a high probability state, so that a new jackpot (jackpot game) occurs relatively early. Become. It should be noted that the special symbol probability variation function may continue until the next big hit occurs. In addition, as the above-mentioned predetermined final number of times, "10000 times" may be set substantially corresponding to the number of variable display times until the occurrence of the next big win.

In addition, after the jackpot game is over, the special symbol variation time shortening function may operate in association with or independently of the special symbol probability variation function. When the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated, the average variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols tends to be shorter than usual, and the number of special symbol lotteries per unit time is improved (the number of jackpots per unit time is increased. can increase the ease of acquisition).

Furthermore, after the jackpot game is over, an electric chew support function (also simply called "electric support") may operate in conjunction with or independently of the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function. As for the electric chew support function, the normal symbol probability variation function, the normal symbol variation time shortening function, and the normal electric accessary 522 opening extension function are activated to increase the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 52. state (also referred to as “easy ball entry state”). In addition, when the normal symbol probability variation function operates, the winning probability of the normal symbol becomes higher than the normal state. When the normal symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the normal symbol variation time is shortened. When the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory 522 operates, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 522 is extended from the normal state. In this easy-to-enter state, there is a higher possibility that the number of normal symbol variations per fixed time period will increase more than usual, and the ease of entering the second starting port 52 will also increase. The possibility of increasing the number of incoming balls is also improved. Therefore, the operation of the electric chew support function increases the chances of winning a prize ball by entering the second starting hole 52 during the period, and as a result, it is possible to continue the game without reducing the number of balls in the player's possession. Become. That is, the "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot game balls, increases. Hereinafter, the state in which the electric chewing support function is activated is also referred to as a "high base state", and the state in which the electric chewing support function is not activated is also referred to as a "low base state".

<Major Functional Configuration of Pachinko Machines>
Next, various functions of the pachinko game machine PM (mainly the main control board 100/the performance control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIG. Incidentally, FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the game machine PM (mainly the main control board 100/performance control board 200).

The main control board 100 includes, as shown in FIG. Special game control means 150 , symbol display control means 155 , electric accessory control means 160 , game state control means 165 , error monitoring control means 170 , main information storage means 180 and command transmission/reception means 190 are included. The above-described means in the main control board 100 are composed of hardware such as the main CPU 101, ROM 102, RAM 103, and electronic circuits provided on the main control board 100, and software such as control programs stored in the ROM 102 and the like. It is a functional representation of something.

The ball entry judging means 110 determines each winning opening based on detection signals from the first starting opening switch 511, the second starting opening switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the large winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switches 611 and 641, and the like. Entry of a game ball into is determined. When the entering ball determination means 110 detects the entry of the game ball by the first starting hole switch 511, it generates an effect control command (referred to as a "first starting hole winning command") indicating that effect, When the entry of the game ball is detected by the 2 starting port switch 521, an effect control command indicating that effect (referred to as "second starting port winning command") is generated, and the operation gate switch 531 detects the game ball. When passing is detected, an effect control command (referred to as "operating gate winning command") indicating that is generated. A production control command (referred to as a "large winning opening winning command") is generated, and when the entry of a game ball is detected by the general winning opening switches 611 and 641, a production control command ("general winning opening (referred to as "winning command") is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. FIG.

The game lottery random number generation means 120 takes in the built-in random number generated by the random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer 110 by software, and adds a soft random number per special symbol to be used for the lottery of the special symbol. A random number is generated per special symbol. The game lottery random number generating means 120 is provided with a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by program processing of the main CPU 101 . These random number counters play a role as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. As the software random numbers, the soft random number per special symbol added to the internal random number for generating the random number per special symbol, and the initial value to be newly updated after one period of updating of the soft random number per special symbol is completed. Special symbol per soft initial value random number for determining , special symbol stop symbol random number used to determine the winning symbol (combination of symbols that will operate the condition device) as a special symbol stop symbol, special symbol stop symbol random number A special symbol stop symbol initial value random number for determining the initial value for a new update after the update of one cycle is completed, a special symbol variation pattern random number for use in selecting a special symbol variation pattern, Special symbol variation addition pattern random number for use in selecting the variation addition pattern of the special symbol, random number per normal symbol for use in the lottery of normal symbols, random number per normal symbol New after one cycle update is completed An initial value random number per normal design for determining an initial value for updating, a normal design variation pattern random number for use in selecting a normal design variation pattern, and the like are included. These software random numbers are updated once each time a timer interrupt process occurs (increment, decrement, addition of prime numbers, etc.). during loop processing) is also updated using the remaining time of the interrupt cycle.

Reservation control means 130 includes special symbol reservation control means 131 and normal symbol reservation control means 132 .

The special symbol retention control means 131 is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 51 or the second start port 52, and the special symbol per random number, which is the lottery random number related to the special symbol game. A symbol random number, a special symbol variation pattern random number, and a special symbol variation additional pattern random number are obtained, and the random number is managed as first special symbol or second special symbol actuation reserve ball information. The special symbol reservation control means 131 stores the operation reservation ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) in the form of being combined with the ball entry order of the reservation ball. Temporarily stored in the 180 first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area.

In the first special symbol reservation storage area and the second special symbol reservation storage area, the reservation 1 storage area (first reservation storage area), the reservation 2 storage area (2 reserved storage area), a reserved 3 storage area (third reserved storage area), and a reserved 4 storage area (fourth reserved storage area). Each reserve storage area can store a set of random numbers per special symbol, random numbers per special symbol, random numbers per special symbol, special symbol variation additional pattern random numbers, and special symbol variation additional pattern random numbers as operation retention ball information. The operation pending ball information is stored in the order of the pending 1 storage area, the pending 2 storage area, the pending 3 storage area, and the pending 4 storage area, while the pending 1 storage area, the pending 2 storage area, the pending 3 storage area, and the pending 4 storage area. Regions are digested in order (first-in, first-out principle). Further, when the hold ball information in the hold 1 storage area is digested, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area are respectively shifted to storage areas with lower numbers, Clear the contents of the Reserved 4 storage area to zero.

In addition, the special symbol reservation control means 131 includes a first special symbol reservation ball number counter for counting the number of operation reservation balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol reservation ball number counter for counting the number of operation reservation balls of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol reserved ball number counter. The special symbol reservation control means 131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter every time one operation reservation ball of the special symbol is acquired as an update processing of the number of operation reservation balls of the special symbol, and one operation reservation ball is digested. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

In addition, when the special symbol reservation control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of operation reservation balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect control command ("symbol storage command") and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. FIG. This one command includes information on both the number of activated balls with the first special symbol and the number of activated balls with the second special symbol. In principle, the operation reserve balls of each special symbol are digested in the order of entry, but in this embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed rather than the first special symbol. , In order to adopt the so-called priority digestion, while the operation reservation ball related to the second special symbol game exists, regardless of the existence of the operation reservation ball related to the first special symbol game, the operation reservation related to the second special symbol game Configured to preferentially digest spheres. In addition, under this priority digestion, if there is an operation pending ball of the second special symbol, even if an operation pending ball of the first special symbol exists, the operation pending ball of the first special symbol is digested. will be put on hold.

The normal symbol reservation control means 132 is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the operation gate 53, and is a lottery random number value related to the normal symbol game, which is a random number value per normal symbol, a random number value per normal symbol, and a normal symbol variation pattern. A random number value is obtained, and the random number value is managed as normal symbol operation retention ball information. The normal symbol reservation control means 132 stores normal symbol operation reservation ball information up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) in the normal symbol reservation storage area of the main information storage means 180 in a form that is combined with the ball entry order of the relevant reserved balls. Temporarily store. In addition, the normal design reservation control means 132 has a normal design reservation ball number counter for counting the number of normal design operation reservation balls. The normal symbol reservation control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one operation reservation ball of the normal symbol is obtained as update processing of the number of operation normal symbol reservation balls, and one operation reservation ball is digested. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

The pre-determination means 135 executes pre-determination for pre-reading notice targeting the operation-reserving ball with a special symbol at a predetermined pre-determination timing. As an example of the above-mentioned pre-determination timing, (1) while waiting for a hit, and when the operation suspension ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not in operation, (2) while waiting for a hit, and Either of the following: (3) when the operation suspension ball with the second special symbol is obtained while the electric chew support function is in operation; It is time to satisfy the conditions. The above pre-determination timing is an example, and the pre-determination timing is changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine (for example, it has a start port related to the second special symbol that does not have a normal electric accessory, and 8 are normally reserved For models that can be accumulated, the above (1) is targeted not only for the first special symbol but also for the second special symbol, etc.) Or even if you adopt a specification that makes a preliminary judgment at any time without setting a preliminary judgment timing good. Also, in each game state, only the operation-reserving ball of the special symbol that is the subject of the game may be subject to the preliminary determination. For example, in the normal game state, only the operation-reserving ball of the first special symbol is subject to the preliminary determination. Then, in the time-saving gaming state, the latent probability variable gaming state, and the probability variable gaming state, it is preferable that only the second special symbol's operation holding ball is subject to prior determination. Specifically, the prior determination means 135 reads out the random number value corresponding to the operation reservation ball acquired this time from the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main information storage means 180, and determines whether it is correct or not. Pre-determination (property pre-determination), pre-determination of the pattern (pre-determination of the symbol), pre-determination of the variation pattern (pre-determination of the variation pattern) are sequentially executed. Although the pre-determination table used in each pre-determination is not shown, the area corresponding to the total number of random numbers is divided into a plurality of areas in each of the pre-determination table, the pre-determination table for the symbol, and the table for pre-determination of the variation pattern. A lottery ID (a number indicating the result of preliminary determination (also referred to as a "predetermination number")) is assigned to each region (determination number). Therefore, the result of this preliminary determination conforms to the result of the main lottery by the special symbol lottery processing means 140 to be described later (result of winning/failure determination, result of symbol determination, result of variation pattern determination). In addition, the winning/failing preliminary determination table, the symbol preliminary determination table, and the like may be the same as the winning/failure lottery table, the symbol lottery table, and the like used for the lottery when the variation is actually started. Here, the fluctuation pattern preliminary determination table is the game situation at the start of fluctuation (whether there is probability variation, whether there is time saving, whether it is during a limited frequency period that is a period for referring to a special fluctuation pattern table, the number of pending balls, etc.) is likely to change, it is desirable to determine which of the plurality of regions it is included in, as described above. In addition, as a modification, it is configured to determine in advance a random value such as a register on the main CPU 101 that is temporarily stored before storing in the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area. You may Then, the pre-determination means 135 sequentially generates an effect control command (referred to as a "pre-determination command") including information on the result of the pre-determination (pre-determination number), and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. store in

The special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes special symbol suitability determination means 141 , special symbol stop symbol determination means 412 , and special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 . In the special symbol lottery processing means 140, when the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is established, in the forefront storage area (suspension 1 storage area) of the special symbol reservation storage area in the main information storage means 180 The stored special symbol random number, special symbol per symbol random number, special symbol variation pattern random number, and special symbol variation additional pattern random number are read out and stored in the special symbol propriety determination area of the main information storage means 180 and the special symbol. Stored in the symbol determination area, the special symbol variation pattern determination area, and the special symbol variation additional pattern determination area. Here, "the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied" means (A1) that the jackpot is not in progress, (A2) that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for variation, and (A3) ) that there is a ball with the first special symbol in operation pending, when all the conditions are satisfied. Further, "the second special symbol variation start condition is satisfied" means (B1) that the jackpot is not in progress, (B2) that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for variation, and (B3). It is when all the conditions of the presence of the second special symbol operation pending ball are satisfied. In addition, when the fluctuation start condition of the first special design and the fluctuation start condition of the second special design are satisfied at the same time, the fluctuation start condition of the second special design is preferentially processed based on the above-mentioned priority digestion. do.

The special symbol success/failure determination means 141 reads a special symbol winning random number value from the special symbol success/failure determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes the success/failure determination, and the determination result corresponds to any of a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. decide whether to The result of this success/failure determination is temporarily stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data "55H", small hit data "33H", loss data "00H"), and is used in subsequent processing. After that, it is cleared when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. The special symbol success/failure determination means 141 holds a special symbol success/failure lottery table referred to during this success/failure determination.

Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol success/fail lottery table. FIG. 5(A) is referred to in the gaming state (low probability state) where the special symbol probability variation function is not operating, and FIG. 5(B) is the gaming state (high probability) where the special symbol probability variation function is operating. state). In the special symbol success/failure lottery table, the random number range of the special symbol per random value and the result of the special symbol success/failure determination (big hit, miss) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 5, in the determination of whether the special symbols are valid, in the game state (low probability state) where the probability variation function of the special symbols is not operating, the random number value per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 204". In the game state (high-probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is activated, a big win occurs when the special symbol per random number falls within the range of "0 to 1506". That is, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the winning probability of the big win varies from low probability "1/319.69" to high probability "1/43.49". In this way, the winning probability of the big win changes according to the game state, but the winning probability of the big win is set equally between the winning judgment of the first special symbol and the winning judgment of the second special symbol. In addition, in the present embodiment, "small hit" is not set as the result of the judgment of the special symbol, but "small hit" may be set as the result of the judgment of the special symbol. The winning probability of the small hit is set to the same winning probability regardless of the game state (low-probability state, high-probability state).

The special symbol stop symbol determining means 142 determines the first special symbol or the second special symbol to be stopped based on the result of the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 6, the special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 includes a first special symbol big-hit symbol table and a second special symbol big-hit symbol table and a second It has a special symbol jackpot symbol table. In the present embodiment, the "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) that triggers the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbols after the jackpot game ends, and the "normal jackpot" means a special pattern after the jackpot game ends. It means a jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) that does not trigger the operation of the stochastic variable function of. In this embodiment, when a specific jackpot is won, the special symbol probability variation function is activated after the jackpot game ends, and continues until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the "specific jackpot" or the "normal jackpot" is won, after the jackpot game ends, the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and the electric chew support function are activated, and the jackpot game is completed. It continues until the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times, 40 times, 60 times, 100 times) after the end or until the next big hit occurs.

FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol big hit symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, a symbol group, a jackpot type, a specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and an opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning port 54 in each round are provided for the symbol random number per special symbol. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for the sake of convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot table, eight types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, eight types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 3 (symbol group C), and 4R. Specific big win 4 (symbol group D), 4R big win 5 (symbol group E), 4R normal big win 1 (symbol group F), 4R normal big win 2 (symbol group G), 4R normal big win 3 (symbol group H) ). In the 4R specific jackpots 1 to 5, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot 54 in one round game is "28 seconds". In the 4R normal jackpots 1 to 3, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is "28 seconds".

FIG. 6B is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol big hit symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, the pattern group, the jackpot type, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning port 54 in each round are provided for the symbol random number per special symbol. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for the sake of convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, three types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, three types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are divided into 16R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group I), 16R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group J), and 2R normal jackpot (symbol group K). . In the 16R specific jackpots 1 and 2, the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is "16 rounds", and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot 54 in one round game is "28 seconds". In the 2R normal jackpot, the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is "2 rounds", and the opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is "3 seconds".

Among various jackpot types, "4R specific jackpots 1 to 5", "4R normal jackpots 1 to 3", and "16R specific jackpots 1 and 2" have long jackpots 54 in all round games during jackpot games. It is a jackpot type that triggers the execution of a round game (also referred to as a “long open round game”) that opens for a time (28 seconds). On the other hand, the "2R normal jackpot" is a trigger for executing a round game (also referred to as a "short opening round game") in which the big winning opening 54 is opened for a short time (3 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. It is a big hit type. In the present embodiment, the long opening round game is such that the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is such that a game ball of a prescribed count number (full count = 10 balls) can be entered into the large winning opening 54 or is easy to enter. It is a round game set to A short opening round game is a round in which the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 is set to make it impossible or difficult to enter a game ball of a prescribed count number (full count = 10 balls) into the big winning opening 54. It is a game. Therefore, the expected value of prize ball acquisition in the jackpot game increases in the order of "2R normal jackpot"<"4R specific jackpots 1-5", "4R normal jackpots 1-3"<"16R specific jackpots 1, 2".

Next, the game state in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 7 is a transition diagram of game states and effect modes in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a latent certainty game state, and a certainty variable game state are set as a plurality of kinds of game states. As the types of the game state, (1) the game state in which the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support function operate is called "probability variation state" or "probability variation game state", 2) The game state in which the special symbol probability variation function is activated and the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function are not activated is called a "latent gaming state" or "latent certainty state", and (3) special The game state in which the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function are activated without the symbol probability variation function is called the "time reduction state" or "time reduction game state", and (4) All functions are activated. A state in which the player is not playing is called a "normal state" or a "normal game state". Here, it can be said that any of the "probability variable gaming state", "latent certainty gaming state" and "time-saving gaming state" is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the "normal gaming state". Therefore, hereinafter, as a game state with a higher degree of advantage for the player than the normal game state, the probability variable game state, latent probability game state, and time-saving game state are also referred to as advantageous game states.

In addition, each game state is a combination of the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state). ) The variable probability game state is “high probability high base state”, (2) the latent probability game state is “high probability low base state”, (3) the time saving game state is “low probability high base state”, (4) normal game state can also be expressed as a "low-probability low-base state". At this time, the special symbol variation time shortening function is a state in which the variation time of at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is the subject of the game in the game state, is shortened. means that That is, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated, at least the first special symbol variation time ( average variation time) is shortened, and the variation display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game (probability variation game state, latent probability game state, time reduction game state), at least the variation time of the second special symbol (average variation time) is reduced.

FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table in this embodiment. In the game state setting table, for each jackpot type (type of pattern group), the number of operations of the special pattern probability variation function and the variation time reduction function (electric chew support function) after the end of the jackpot game is set. ing. In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol win/loss determination is a big hit, the game state after the end of the big win game is (1) a big win type (type of symbol group) and (2) a game at the time of winning a big win. determined according to the state. In addition, the number of times each game state continues (the number of times the special symbols are displayed) is the number of times the probability variation function of the special symbols is activated (referred to as the "probability variation number"), and the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated. It is set in accordance with the number of times to operate (referred to as "fluctuation time reduction times") and the number of times the electric chew support function operates (referred to as "electric support times"). In addition, in this embodiment, the variable time reduction function of the special symbol and the electric chew support function start operating at the same time and end the operation at the same time, so the "variation time reduction number" and the "electric support number" are the same. (Therefore, in FIG. 8, the description of "the number of times the electric sapo is operated" is omitted).

(4R specific jackpot 1)
When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A)" is won, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal game state, the number of probability fluctuations "10000 times" and the number of times of fluctuation time reduction "20""times", the number of times of electric support "20 times" are set, and the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches 20 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 20 times. When the variable probability game state ends when the number of times of variable display of the special symbols reaches 20 times, the state shifts to the latent probability game state from the next variable display of the special symbols. Also, if the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A)" is won, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a time-saving game state, a latent certain game state, or a certain variable game state. "10000 times", the number of fluctuation time shortening times "10000 times", and the number of electric support times "10000 times" are set, and the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the big hit game is over. In this variable probability game state, a huge number of ``10000 times'' is set as the number of continuations (the number of times of probability variation, the number of times of shortening the variation time, and the number of times of electrical support), and the jackpot is not won until the number of times of continuation is reached. Since it is almost impossible to win stochastically (about 1/44), it will continue until the next big win occurs.

(4R specific jackpot 2)
When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B)" is won, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal game state, the probability fluctuation number "10000 times" and the fluctuation time reduction number "40""times", the number of electric support times "40 times" are set, and the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches 40 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 40 times. When the variable probability game state ends when the number of times of variable display of the special symbols reaches 40 times, the state shifts to the latent probability game state from the next variable display of the special symbols. Also, if the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B)" is won, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a time-saving game state, a latent certain game state, or a certain variable game state. "10000 times", the number of fluctuation time shortening times "10000 times", and the number of electric support times "10000 times" are set, and the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the big hit game is over. This variable probability gaming state, as described above, substantially continues until the next big hit occurs.

(4R specific jackpot 3)
When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot 3 (symbol group C)" is won, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal game state, the probability fluctuation number "10000 times", the fluctuation time reduction number "60""times", the number of times of electric support "60 times" are set, and the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches 60 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 60 times. When the variable probability game state ends when the number of times of variable display of the special symbols reaches 60 times, the state shifts to the latent probability game state from the next variable display of the special symbols. Also, if the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot 3 (symbol group C)" is won, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a time-saving game state, a latent certain game state, or a certain variable game state. "10000 times", the number of fluctuation time shortening times "10000 times", and the number of electric support times "10000 times" are set, and the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the big hit game is over. This variable probability gaming state, as described above, substantially continues until the next big hit occurs.

(4R specific jackpot 4)
If you win the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot 4 (symbol group D)", regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of probability fluctuations "10000 times", the number of fluctuation time reduction The support number "10000 times" is set, and the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This variable probability gaming state, as described above, substantially continues until the next big hit occurs.

(4R specific jackpot 5)
If you win the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot 5 (symbol group E)", regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of probability fluctuations "10000 times", the number of fluctuation time reduction The support number "10000 times" is set, and the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This variable probability gaming state, as described above, substantially continues until the next big hit occurs.

(4R normal jackpot 1)
When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot 1 (symbol group F)" is won, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal game state or a latent game state, the number of times of probability fluctuation "0 times", fluctuation The number of times of shortening time "20 times" and the number of times of electrical support "20 times" are set, and the time saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches 20 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 20 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches 20 times, the normal game state is entered from the next variable display of special symbols. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot 1 (symbol group F)" is won, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability variable game state or a time-saving game state, the probability change number "0 times", The number of fluctuation time shortening times "100 times" and the number of electric power support times "100 times" are set, and the time saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big win game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 100 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches 100 times, the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

(4R normal jackpot 2)
When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot 2 (symbol group G)" is won, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal game state or the latent game state, the number of times of probability fluctuation "0 times", fluctuation The number of times of shortening time "40 times" and the number of times of electric support "40 times" are set, and the time saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches 40 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 40 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches 40 times, the normal game state is entered from the next variable display of special symbols. Also, when the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot 2 (symbol group G)" is won, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability variable game state or a time-saving game state, the probability change number "0 times", The number of fluctuation time shortening times "100 times" and the number of electric power support times "100 times" are set, and the time saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big win game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 100 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches 100 times, the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

(4R normal jackpot 3)
When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot 1 (symbol group H)" is won, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal game state or a latent game state, the number of times of probability fluctuation "0 times", fluctuation The number of times of shortening time "60 times" and the number of times of electrical support "60 times" are set, and the time saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches 60 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 60 times. When the time-saving game state is terminated by the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaching 60 times, the state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of special symbols. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot 3 (symbol group H)" is won, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability variable game state or a time-saving game state, the probability change number "0 times", A variation time reduction frequency "100 times" and an electric power support frequency "100 times" are set, and a time saving game state is set as a game state after the end of the big hit game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 100 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches 100 times, the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

(16R specific jackpot 1)
If you win the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group I)", regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of probability fluctuations "10000 times", the number of fluctuation time reduction The support number "10000 times" is set, and the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This variable probability gaming state, as described above, substantially continues until the next big hit occurs.

(16R specific jackpot 2)
If you win the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group J)", regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of probability fluctuations "10000 times", the number of fluctuation time reduction The support number "10000 times" is set, and the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This variable probability gaming state, as described above, substantially continues until the next big hit occurs.

(2R normal jackpot)
When the second special symbol "2R normal jackpot (symbol group K)" is won, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the probability fluctuation number "0 times", the fluctuation time reduction number "100 times", The number of times "100 times" is set, and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 100 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches 100 times, the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 determines a special symbol variation pattern (hereinafter also referred to as "main variation pattern") based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value. Here, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 15, the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 holds a plurality of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting the main variation pattern. The special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 selects one variation pattern table from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state. The relationship between this variation pattern selection state and the variation pattern table will be described later. Each variation pattern table defines a plurality of types of main variation patterns. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, the "selection rate" is indicated, but in fact, according to the special symbol variation pattern random number, the judgment value (random number range) for determining the main variation pattern is It is set, and the main variation pattern is determined based on which determination value the special symbol variation pattern random number belongs to.

In this embodiment, the execution time (variation time) of the variable display of the special symbols is composed of the total time of the "basic variable time" and the "variable additional time". "Basic fluctuation time" is specified based on the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern (main fluctuation pattern). "Variation addition time" is specified based on the type of special symbol variation addition pattern (also referred to as "main variation addition pattern"), which will be described later. That is, in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation time means the total time obtained by adding the "variation addition time" specified by the main variation addition pattern to the "basic variation time" specified by the main variation pattern. do.

Here, the above variation pattern selection state will be described. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection state table in this embodiment. The variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation pattern table) of the special symbol. In this embodiment, as six types of variation pattern selection states, "selection state 1", "selection state 2", "selection state 3", "selection state 4", "selection state 5", "selection state 6" is set.

Selection state 1 is a variation pattern selection state that is set corresponding to the normal game state or the hidden game state. Also, this selection state 1 is set corresponding to the variable display when the effect mode currently being executed is a "normal mode" or a "special mode" which will be described later.

Selection states 2 to 4 are variation pattern selection states that are set corresponding to the time saving gaming state or probability variation gaming state. In addition, this selection state 2 is a variable display other than the branch game when the presently executed production mode is the "suppression chance mode" described later (1st to 19th rotations, 21st to 39th rotations, 41st to 59th rotations, etc.) , from the 61st spin until the next big hit). The selection states 3 and 4 are set corresponding to the variable display (20th, 40th, and 60th rotations) of the branching game when the effect mode currently being executed is the "suppression chance mode" described later. . Here, selection state 3 corresponds to a branching game in which the dominated chance mode will continue, and selection state 4 corresponds to a branching game in which the dominated chance mode ends.

Selection state 5 is a variation pattern selection state that is set corresponding to the probability variation gaming state. Further, this selection state 5 is set corresponding to the variable display when the performance mode currently being executed is the "Gento rush mode" described later.

Selection state 6 is a variation pattern selection state that is set corresponding to the time-saving gaming state. Further, this selection state 6 is set corresponding to the variable display when the performance mode currently being executed is the "revenge mode" which will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 15, the special symbol variation pattern table has different columns to be referred to for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and obtains the same special symbol variation pattern random number value. Even so, different variation patterns can be selected. here,
The number of operation pending balls ("0 pending", "1 to 2 pending", "3 pending") described in each figure is the first special if the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol It means the number of operation pending balls of the symbol (the number of operation pending balls after holding digestion), and if it is a variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol, the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol (operation holding balls after holding digestion number). The number of balls with pending operation is the number of balls with pending operation that exist at the time of the fluctuation pattern lottery (at the start of the relevant fluctuation display/after digestion of the holding) (does not include balls with pending operation that have been digested by the relevant fluctuation display). . In addition, as a modification thereof, the total value of the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used. In addition, during the limited frequency period (a state in which a special variation pattern table is referred to, and a period in which the variation pattern of the final variation in the high probability high base state and the low probability high base state is selected), the first special symbol, Regardless of the second special symbol, the variation pattern lottery may be performed using a common table, and in that case, it is particularly desirable to use a common table when selecting the missing variation pattern When selecting the variation pattern of the big hit, since the type of special game that can be executed may differ depending on the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a common variation pattern corresponding to the type of special game is selected. It is preferable not to use the table of

The variation effect of the decorative symbols performed in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbols is determined based on the type (variation time) of the variation pattern of the special symbols. 10 to 15, for reference, also describe the contents of the variable effect set corresponding to each variation pattern (variation time). In the figure, "super shortened variation", "shortened variation", and "normal variation" are effects in which the decorative patterns in the three rows change, and without going through the reach state even once, they become "off" with so-called loose eyes. is. In the following, ultra-shortening variation, shortening variation and normal variation are also collectively referred to as "non-reach deviation". In this non-reach deviation, the variation modes are different from each other in that the variation display stops in a shorter period of time in the short variation than in the normal variation and in the ultra-short variation than in the short variation.

"N reach (normal reach)" is a state (reach state) where the same decorative pattern is stopped in 2 rows (generally left and right rows) of the 3 rows of decorative patterns, and the remaining 1 row (generally In this ready-to-win performance, if a different decorative pattern stops in the middle row), it becomes ``missing'', and if the same decorative pattern stops in the remaining one row (generally, the middle row), it becomes a ``jackpot''. In this embodiment, the variation pattern of N reach is not set, but naturally the variation pattern of N reach may be set.

“SP Reach (Super Reach)” is a reach production with relatively higher expectations for big hits than the above N Reach, and has evolved from N Reach, for example, still images and videos such as animation and live action are displayed. It is a reach performance. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of SP reach A to D are prepared as types of SP reach. SP reach A to C are reach effects that are executed when the effect mode currently being executed is the normal mode or the special mode. "SP Reach A" is a reach effect in which two main characters (one ally character and one companion character) appear. "SP Reach B" is a reach effect in which three main characters (one ally character and two companion characters) appear. "SP Reach C" is a reach performance in which four main characters (one ally character and three companion characters) appear. This SP reach A to C is a SP reach that can be selected when the result of the judgment of whether the first special symbol is a "jackpot" when the performance mode currently being executed is the normal mode or the special mode. In this embodiment, the order of "SP reach A"<"SP reach B"<"SP reach C" indicates that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high. In other words, the greater the number of appearances of the main characters (fellow characters), the higher the expectation for a big hit (SP reach A<SP reach B<SP reach C). It should be noted that if a fellow character appears in the fellow warfare presentation, which will be described later, before developing into the SP reach A to C, it is guaranteed that the fellow character that has appeared in the fellow warfare presentation will also appear in the SP reach. That is, of the three fellow characters, at least the fellow characters that have appeared in the fellow warfare production will also appear in the SP reach A to C (the number of fellow characters appearing in the fellow warfare production≦the number of fellow characters in the SP reach production). appearance number). Therefore, the number of appearances of fellow characters in the companion war effect guarantees the minimum number of appearances of fellow characters in the SP reach, and the occurrence of SP reach of the type corresponding to the minimum number is guaranteed. . For example, if two companion characters appear in a special effect (one of the effects that are newly added during fluctuations), and after this friend-participation effect develops into SP reach, It is guaranteed that the number of characters appearing is 2 or more (the number of main characters appearing is 3 or more), that is, development to SP reach B or more (SP reach B or SP reach C). As a modified example, it does not have to be guaranteed, and when a fellow character appears in a fellow warfare presentation to be described later that is performed before developing into SP reach A to C, the fellow character that appeared in this fellow warfare presentation is in SP reach. In other words, among the three fellow characters, at least the fellow characters that have appeared in the companion war production are likely to appear in SP reach A to C. Often, for example, when two fellow characters appear in the companion war effect, if the SP reach develops after this friend war effect is performed, the number of companion characters will be two or more (the number of main characters will be three). or above), that is, the specifications may be such that there is a high possibility of developing to SP reach B or higher (SP reach B or SP reach C). In addition, the detailed content of the companion participation production will be described later. On the other hand, "SP reach D" is a reach effect that can be executed in any effect mode. This "SP Reach D" is a battle reach in which a fellow character fights an enemy character. In addition, unlike "SP reach A to C", "SP reach D" is selected only when the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a big hit (if the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a loss is not selected). Details of the SP reach D (battle reach) will be described later.

In the "pseudo-continuous", the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (pseudo-stop, temporary stop) and again variably displayed during one variative display of the decorative symbols, so that the quasi-variation display is performed multiple times. It is an effect (pseudo-continuous effect, pseudo-fluctuation effect, pseudo-continuous-fluctuation effect, re-fluctuation effect). The pseudo-continuous effect is a predetermined effect (predetermined effect) in which a pseudo-variation of temporary stop or fixed stop after all the decorative symbols in three rows start to change or re-variate is executed a plurality of times. Hereinafter, the number of pseudo fluctuations is also referred to as "pseudo continuation number". In the variation display in which the number of pseudo consecutive times is 2, the first pseudo variation (referred to as "pseudo 1 variation") is the period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the temporary stop, and the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is The second pseudo fluctuation (referred to as “pseudo second fluctuation”) is from the start of re-fluctuation to the final stop. In the variation display in which the number of pseudo consecutive times is 3, the first pseudo variation (referred to as "pseudo 1 variation") is from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the temporary stop, and the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is From the start of re-fluctuation to the temporary stop is the second pseudo-fluctuation (referred to as "pseudo 2 fluctuation"), and from the start of the re-fluctuation of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern to the final stop. This is the third pseudo fluctuation (referred to as "pseudo 3 fluctuation"). In addition, even in a variation display that does not develop into a pseudo run, for convenience of explanation, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the final stop may be referred to as the first pseudo variation, and may be referred to as "pseudo 1 variation". . It indicates that the higher the number of pseudo-runs, the higher the possibility of developing into an SP reach with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. Further, among the three rows of decorative symbols, the left and right rows of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the ready state (tenpai), and the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the non-reach state. Expectations for big hits are higher than in the case. Further, when the decorative symbols on the left row and the right row are temporarily stopped in the non-reach state or the ready-to-win state, the degree of expectation for a big hit increases according to the type of the left row decorative symbols. For example, compared to the decorative patterns of "2", "4", "6" and "8", the decorative patterns of "1" and "5" are more likely to hit the jackpot than the decorative patterns of "1" and "5". The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher for the decorative pattern of "3", and the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher for the decorative pattern of "7" than that of the decorative pattern of "3". The increase in the number of pseudo-runs from the first to the second and from the second to the third is also referred to as "continuation of the pseudo-run".

"Pseudo 1 swaying" is an effect to sway whether or not the next psuedo variation (second psuedo variation) progresses during the execution of psuedo 1 variation (first psuedo variation). "Pseudo 2 swaying" is an effect to sway whether or not the next psuedo fluctuation (third psuedo fluctuation) progresses during execution of the psuedo 2 fluctuation (second psuedo fluctuation). Hereinafter, the “pseudo 1 swaying” and the “pseudo 2 swaying” may be collectively referred to as “pseudo swaying swaying (pseudo swaying performance)”. In the pseudo-continuous fanning effect, a predetermined pseudo-continuous design (the details of the pseudo-continuous design will be described later) is displayed as the middle design (final design) with the left design and the right design out of the three rows of decorative designs being temporarily stopped and displayed. ) is variably displayed in the vicinity of a predetermined temporary stop position, and is a specific effect (specific effect) that prompts whether or not the temporary stop display will be performed. If the next pseudo-variation is performed (if the pseudo-continuous effect is successful), the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the predetermined temporary stop position, and if the next pseudo-variation is not performed (the pseudo-continuous effect is If it fails), the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped and displayed at the predetermined temporary stop position and other decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped and displayed at the predetermined temporary stop position. Only the pattern continues to be displayed in a variable manner (for example, if it is in a tenpai state, it develops into SP reach). Incidentally, in the present embodiment, before performing the pseudo-continuous fanning (pseudo-1 fanning, pseudo-2 fanning), by performing false pseudo-fanging in advance, it is possible to simulate the pseudo-long fanning (pseudo-1 fanning, pseudo-2 fanning). There is a production (aura use production) that makes it look as if it has been redone. Details of the aura use effect will be described later.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 1. As shown in FIG. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 1. The variation pattern table 1 has different table contents according to the result of winning/failing determination (big win, losing).

Variation pattern table 1 for deviation includes main variation patterns PH1-1 (3 seconds), PH1-2 (7 seconds), PH1-3 (10 seconds), PH1-4 (18 seconds), PH1-5 (30 seconds), PH1-6 (50 seconds), PH1-7 (40 seconds), PH1-8 (38 seconds), PH1-9 (58 seconds), PH1-10 (48 seconds), PH1-11 (60 seconds) , PH1-12 (80 seconds), and PH1-13 (70 seconds) are set. If the result of the suitability determination of the first special symbol is "miss", one of the main variation patterns PH1-1 to PH1-13 is selected. In this embodiment, if the result of the validity determination of the first special symbol is "missing", the reference destination according to the number of operation pending balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the first special symbol are set so that different main variation patterns can be selected even if the special symbol variation pattern random numbers are the same. Specifically, the larger the number of balls with the first special symbol activated, the easier it is to select the main variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively short, and the number of the suspended balls with the first special symbol activated. The smaller is, the easier it is to select the main variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long. On the other hand, if the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation time is relative The main fluctuation pattern PH1-1 or PH1-2, which is set to be relatively short, is selected. In addition, as a modification, if the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", it does not depend on the number of operation suspensions of the second special symbol, and only the main variation pattern of the shortened variation is selected or the shortened variation It is good also as the structure which can select a variation pattern most (it is preferable that the selection ratio is the same regardless of the number of operation retention balls of the 2nd special symbol). In addition, as a modification, normal fluctuation may be divided into normal fluctuation A (5 seconds) and normal fluctuation B (7 seconds). The rate may be 40% and the shortening variation and normal variation A may not be selected (the selection rate of PH1-4 to PH1-13 is the same as the selection rate in FIG. 10). When the selection rate of normal variation A is set to 40%, shortened variation and normal variation B are not selected (the selection rate of PH1-4 to PH1-13 is the same as the selection rate in FIG. 10). assumes a selectivity of 40% for shortened variation, and normal variation A and normal variation B are not selected (PH1-4
~ The selection rate of PH1-13 is the same as the selection rate in FIG. 10), and for the second special symbol, select only the shortened variation in any of the reservations 0 to 3, or normal It is desirable to select variation B only.

The variation pattern table 1 for the big hit includes main variation patterns PA1-1 (30 seconds), PA1-2 (50 seconds), PA1-3 (40 seconds), PA1-4 (38 seconds), PA1-5 (58 second), PA1-6 (48 seconds), PA1-7 (60 seconds), PA1-8 (80 seconds), PA1-9 (70 seconds), PA1-10 (110 seconds), PA1-11 (90 seconds) , PA1-12 (100 seconds), PA1-13 (120 seconds), and PA1-14 (120 seconds) are set. When the result of the success/failure determination of the first special symbol is "jackpot", one of the main variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-9 is selected regardless of the jackpot type (specific jackpot, normal jackpot). be. That is, if the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol is a "jackpot", as described in the "production content" column in the figure, any of the SP reach A to C in the variable display A main variation pattern is selected that evolves to . Here, the basic variation times of PA1-1 to PA1-9 are the same as the basic variation times of PH1-5 to PH1-13 in the variation pattern table 1 for losing, but the production that does not appear at the time of the big hit (eg , etc.), the time PA1-1 is obtained by adding 10 seconds to the basic fluctuation time of PH1-5 to PH1-13 in the fluctuation pattern table 1 for loss. It may be the basic variation time of ~PA1-9, and furthermore, in the case of a big hit with a reversal performance (a performance with unexpectedness that makes it look like it has come off once and then informs you that it is actually a big win), it is not 10 seconds. It is good also as time which added 15 seconds. On the other hand, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is "jackpot", if the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", the main variation pattern PA1-10 is selected, and if the jackpot type is "specific jackpot". For example, main variation patterns PA1-11 to PA1-14 are selected. That is, when the result of the judgment of whether or not the second special symbol is a "jackpot", as described in the "contents of production" column in the figure, the variation pattern that develops into a battle reach in the variation display is selected. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit in the normal mode, the production mode is changed from the normal mode to the revenge mode (battle mode). Then, the variation pattern PA1-110 to 1-14 selected when the result of the determination of the success or failure of the second special symbol in the variation pattern table 1 (normal mode variation pattern table) is a big hit, and the variation pattern table 6 (Variation pattern table of revenge mode) The same basic variation time (same effect content) as the variation pattern PA6-1 to PA6-5 selected when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is a big hit is associated with . In addition, in the present embodiment, selection of the main variation pattern (SP reach D: victory) that can be selected when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "specific jackpot" Although the rates are set to the same probability (25%), different selection rates may be set for each of the production routes 2 to 5 of the SP reach D (battle production).

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 2. As shown in FIG. The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 2. That is, this variation pattern table 2 is referred to in the variation display of the 1st to 19th rotations, the 21st to 39th rotations, the 41st to 59th rotations, and the 61st and subsequent rotations in the suppression chance mode. The variation pattern table 2 has different table contents according to the result of winning/failing determination (big win, losing).

Main fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (1 second), PH2-2 (3 seconds), and PH2-3 (7 seconds) are set in the fluctuation pattern table 2 for loss. When the result of the suitability determination of the first special symbol is "miss", the main variation pattern PH2-2 does not depend on the number of balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the second special symbol. Or PH2-3 is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the suitability determination of the second special symbol is "off", one of the main variation patterns PH2-1 to PH2-3 is selected. In this embodiment, if the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the reference destination according to the number of operation pending balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the second special symbol are set so that different main variation patterns can be selected even if the special symbol variation pattern random numbers are the same. Specifically, the larger the number of balls with the second special symbol activated, the easier it is to select the main variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively short, and the number of the balls with the second special symbol activated The smaller is, the easier it is for the main variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively longer to be selected. As a modification, for the first special symbol, only normal variation may be selected (selection rate is 100%) at any time of reservation 0 to 3, and for the second special symbol, When Hold 0, only normal variation is selected (selection rate is 100%). When Hold 1-2, only shortened variation is selected (selection rate is 100%). Alternatively, only shortened variations may be selected (selection rate is 100%). In addition to the super-shortened variation, shortened variation, and normal variation, the fanning variation (15 seconds) for producing a production that does not develop as a result by fueling the development to SP reach D is at least a variation of the second special symbol. In that case, the selection rate of the fluctuation fluctuation is uniformly 10% at any time of suspension 0 to 3, and the other 90% is the same as the distribution ratio of the selection rate in this figure. (For example, when the hold is 0, the shortened variation is selected by 18% and the normal variation is selected by 72%), or it may be the same as the allocation ratio of the selection rate in the modification (for example, the hold When 0, normal variation is selected at 90%). Further, these modified examples may also be applied to variation pattern tables 5 and 6 for losing, which will be described later.

The variation pattern table 2 for the big hit includes main variation patterns PA2-1 (110 seconds), PA2-2 (90 seconds), PA2-3 (100 seconds), PA2-4 (120 seconds), PA2-5 (120 seconds) is set. When the result of the success/failure determination of the first special symbol is a big win, the main variation pattern PA2-1 is selected if the big win type is "normal big win", and the main variation if the big win type is "specific big win". One of the patterns PA2-2 to PA2-5 is selected. Similarly, when the result of the second special symbol hit/fail judgment is a big hit, if the big hit type is "normal big hit", the main variation pattern PA2-1 is selected, and if the big hit type is "specific big hit" , main variation patterns PA2-2 to PA2-5.

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. As shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 3 is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 3. That is, this variation pattern table 3 is referenced in the variation display of the 20th, 40th, and 60th rotations in the suppression chance mode (limited to when the suppression chance mode continues). The variation pattern table 3 has different table contents according to the result of winning/failing determination (big win, losing).

A main variation pattern PH3-1 (30 seconds) is set in the variation pattern table 3 for loss. If the result of the suitability determination of the first special symbol is "miss", the main variation pattern PH3-1 does not depend on the number of balls that are activated in the first special symbol (0 / 1 to 2 / 3). selected. Similarly, when the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the main variation pattern PH3 does not depend on the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) -1 is selected. That is, in the variation display (branch game in control chance mode) in which this variation pattern table 3 is referred to, if the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "miss", "suppression chance A variation pattern PH3-1 in which "mode continuation effect" is performed is selected. "Control chance mode continuous production" is a shutter effect (the door image changes from open state to closed state → open state over almost the entire screen), and the currently running production mode (control chance mode) will change next time. This is an effect that notifies that the display will continue after the display. In other words, the “suppression chance mode continuation effect” is an effect that encourages whether or not the change display is the final change display of the control chance mode (high base state). It should be noted that the "suppression chance mode continuation effect" corresponds to a base branch effect (FIG. 56), which will be described later.

The variation pattern table 3 for the big hit includes main variation patterns PA3-1 (110 seconds), PA3-2 (90 seconds), PA3-3 (100 seconds), PA3-4 (120 seconds), PA3-5 (120 seconds) is set. When the result of the success/failure determination of the first special symbol is a big win, if the big win type is "normal big win", the variation pattern PA3-1 is selected, and if the big win type is "specific big win", the main variation pattern. One of PA3-2 to PA3-5 is selected. Similarly, when the result of the second special symbol win/loss determination is a big hit, if the big win type is "normal big hit", the main variation pattern PA3-1 is selected, and if the big win type is "specific big hit" , main fluctuation patterns PA3-2 to PA3-5 are selected. That is, this big-hit variation pattern table 3 has substantially the same setting contents as the above-described big-hit variation pattern table 2 .

(Variation pattern table 4)
FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 4. As shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 4 is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 4. That is, this variation pattern table 4 is referenced in the variation display of the 20th, 40th, and 60th rotations of the suppression chance mode (limited to when the suppression chance mode ends). The contents of the variation pattern table 4 differ according to the results of the win/fail judgment (big win, loss).

A main variation pattern PH4-1 (30 seconds) is set in the variation pattern table 4 for loss. If the result of the suitability determination of the first special symbol is "missing", the main variation pattern PH4-1 does not depend on the number of balls that are activated in the first special symbol (0 / 1 to 2 / 3). selected. Similarly, when the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the main variation pattern PH4 does not depend on the number of operation pending balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the second special symbol -1 is selected. That is, in the variation display (branch game in control chance mode) in which this variation pattern table 4 is referred to, if the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "miss", "suppression chance A variation pattern PH4-1 in which a "mode end effect" is performed is selected. "Control chance mode end effect" is a shutter effect (shutter image changes from open state → closed state → open state over almost the entire screen), and the current effect mode (control chance mode) is displayed It is an effect to inform that it will end at. In other words, the "suppression chance mode end effect" is an effect to arouse whether or not the variable display is the final variable display of the suppression chance mode (high base state). It should be noted that the "control chance mode end effect" corresponds to a base branch effect (FIG. 56), which will be described later.

The variation pattern table 4 for the big hit includes main variation patterns PA4-1 (110 seconds), PA4-2 (90 seconds), PA4-3 (100 seconds), PA4-4 (120 seconds), PA4-5 (120 seconds) is set. When the result of the success/failure determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the main variation pattern PA4-1 is selected if the big win type is "normal big win", and the main variation if the big win type is "specific big win". One of the patterns PA4-2 to PA4-5 is selected. Similarly, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the main variation pattern PA4-1 is selected if the big hit type is a "normal big hit", and if the big hit type is a "specific big hit". , main variation patterns PA4-2 to PA4-5 are selected. In other words, this big-hit variation pattern table 4 has substantially the same setting contents as those of the above-described big-hit variation pattern tables 2 and 3 .

(Variation pattern table 5)
FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 5. As shown in FIG. The variation pattern table 5 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 5. The variation pattern table 5 has different table contents according to the result of winning/failing determination (big win, losing).

In the fluctuation pattern table 5 for loss, main fluctuation patterns PH5-1 (1 second), PH5-2 (3 seconds), and PH5-3 (7 seconds) are set. When the result of the suitability determination of the first special symbol is "miss", the main variation pattern PH5-2 does not depend on the number of activated balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the first special symbol Or PH5-3 is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the suitability determination of the second special symbol is "off", one of the main variation patterns PH5-1 to PH5-3 is selected. In this embodiment, if the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the reference destination according to the number of operation pending balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the second special symbol are set so that the contents of the table are different, and even if the special symbol variation pattern random number is the same, different variation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the larger the number of balls with the second special symbol activated, the more easily the variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively short is selected, and the number of the balls with the second special symbol activated is more likely to be selected. The smaller the number, the easier it is for the main variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively longer to be selected. The change pattern table 5 for loss has substantially the same setting contents as the above-described change pattern table 2 for loss.

The big hit variation pattern table 5 includes main variation patterns PA5-1 (110 seconds), PA5-2 (90 seconds), PA5-3 (100 seconds), PA5-4 (120 seconds), PA5-5 (120 seconds) is set. When the result of the success/failure determination of the first special symbol is a big win, the main variation pattern PA5-1 is selected if the big win type is "normal big win", and the main variation if the big win type is "specific big win". One of the patterns PA5-2 to PA5-5 is selected. Similarly, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the main variation pattern PA5-1 is selected if the big hit type is a "normal big hit", and if the big hit type is a "specific big hit". , main variation patterns PA5-2 to PA5-5. This big-hit variation pattern table 5 has substantially the same setting contents as the above-described big-hit variation pattern table 2 .

(Variation pattern table 6)
FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 6. As shown in FIG. The variation pattern table 6 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 6. The contents of the variation pattern table 6 differ according to the result of the win/fail judgment (big win, loss).

In the fluctuation pattern table 6 for loss, main fluctuation patterns PH6-1 (1 second), PH6-2 (3 seconds), and PH6-3 (7 seconds) are set. If the result of the suitability determination of the first special symbol is "missing", the variation pattern PH6-2 or PH6-3 is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the suitability determination of the second special symbol is "off", one of the main variation patterns PH6-1 to PH6-3 is selected. In this embodiment, if the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the reference destination according to the number of operation pending balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the second special symbol are set so that the contents of the table are different, and even if the special symbol variation pattern random number is the same, different variation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the larger the number of balls with the second special symbol activated, the more easily the variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively short is selected, and the number of the balls with the second special symbol activated is more likely to be selected. The smaller the number, the easier it is for a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively longer to be selected. It should be noted that this change pattern table 6 for loss has substantially the same setting contents as the above-described change pattern tables 2 and 5 for loss.

The variation pattern table 6 for big hits includes main variation patterns PA6-1 (110 seconds), PA6-2 (90 seconds), PA6-3 (100 seconds), PA6-4 (120 seconds), PA6-5 (120 seconds) is set. When the result of the success/failure determination of the first special symbol is a big win, the main variation pattern PA6-1 is selected if the big win type is "normal big win", and the main variation if the big win type is "specific big win". One of the patterns PA6-2 to PA6-5 is selected. Similarly, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is a big win, if the big win type is "normal big win", the main variation pattern PA6-1 is selected, and if the big win type is "specific big win" , main variation patterns PA6-2 to PA6-5 are selected. It should be noted that this big-hit variation pattern table 6 has substantially the same setting contents as those of the above-described big-hit variation pattern tables 2 and 5 .

Here, in this embodiment, the main variation pattern of battle reach (SP reach D) is set in all variation pattern tables 1 to 6. "Battle Reach" is SP Reach in which a battle effect is developed in which a teammate character battles an enemy character to determine victory or defeat. In this embodiment, when the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "miss", the main variation pattern of the battle reach (SP reach D) is not selected, and the first special When the result of the judgment of whether the design or the second special design is "big hit" (However, when the variation pattern table 1 is set, only when the result of the judgment of the second special design is "big hit" ), the main variation pattern of battle reach is selected. Therefore, at the time when the battle reach develops during the execution of the variable display (at the time when the battle presentation is started), it is suggested to the player that he or she has won the big prize. Here, when the result of the success/fail judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "jackpot", if the jackpot type wins the "specific jackpot", the result of the battle production is a variation pattern of "victory". is selected, and when the jackpot type wins the "normal jackpot", the main variation pattern in which the result of the battle production is "defeat" is selected. Therefore, when the ally character wins the enemy character in the battle performance during execution of the variable display, the player is suggested that the specific big win (the big win that triggers the transition to the probability variable game state) has been won. On the other hand, when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character in the battle effect during execution of the variable display, the player is suggested that the player has won a normal jackpot (jackpot that triggers a fall to the normal game state).

In this way, in the variation pattern tables 1 to 6, the basic variation time of the special symbol is defined for each main variation pattern, but even if any main variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time of the special symbol (Fixed display time) is set to "0.5 second". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the special symbols is the time during which the special symbols are definitely stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained). In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time (basic variation time, variation addition time) and the fixed stop time of the decorative symbols are also set corresponding to the variation time (basic variation time, variation addition time) and the fixed stop time of the special symbols. It is

In addition, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 selects the above-described special symbol variation pattern (main variation pattern), then refers to the main variation addition table associated with the selected main variation pattern, and selects a plurality of types. One main variation addition pattern is selected from among the main variation addition patterns. This main variation addition pattern specifies an additional variation time (variation addition time) to be added to the basic variation time. In this embodiment, as described above, the total time obtained by adding the "variation additional time" to the "basic variation time" is defined as the special symbol variation time (variation time = basic variation time + variation addition time). By suppressing the number of main variation patterns thereby suppressing the storage capacity of the main control board 100 related to the main variation patterns, by combining multiple types of main variation additional patterns for one main variation pattern, substantially can create a large number of main variation patterns according to the number of combinations. In the present embodiment, the variable addition time is used as a performance scale (whole scale) of a special performance, which will be described later. Details of the main variation addition pattern will be described later.

After selecting the special symbol variation pattern and the variation addition pattern, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 instructs the effect control board 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol, so that communication with the effect control board 200 is normal. Production control command (communication inspection command) for checking whether or not it is being performed, production control command (variation additional information specification command) including main variation addition pattern (information for adding or subtracting variation time), main variation pattern Generate a production control command (variation pattern specification command) containing information, a production control command (symbol specification command) containing information on the character production number (symbol group and game state), etc. (Hereafter, these commands are collectively called " ), which is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 .

The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 has normal symbol suitability determination means 146 , normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 , and normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148 . The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 reads out the normal symbol random number and the normal symbol variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area in the normal symbol reserve storage area when the normal symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied. They are stored in the normal symbol suitability determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, the "normal symbol variation start condition" is (1) normal symbol variation standby, and (2) presence of a normal symbol operation pending ball. When all these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the normal symbols are in a state where fluctuation can be started (state where the fluctuation start condition is established).

The normal symbol suitability determination means 146 reads out the normal symbol hit random number from the normal symbol suitability determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes the normal symbol suitability determination, and the determination result is either "hit" or "loss". to determine whether The result of the normal symbol determination is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180, used in subsequent processing, and then cleared when the normal symbol variation stops. The normal symbol suitability determination means 146 holds a normal symbol success/failure lottery table (not shown) that is referenced when the normal symbol success/failure determination is made. The probability of hitting the normal pattern is set to "1/3001" when the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of normal patterns) is not operating, and the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of normal patterns) is operating. is set to "2999/3001".

The normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to a normal symbol stop symbol table (not shown), and if the result of the determination of whether the normal symbol is a win, a predetermined winning symbol (a trigger for the normal electric accessory 522 to operate While selecting the stop pattern to become), when the result of the judgment of the normal pattern is a loss, a predetermined losing pattern (a stop pattern that does not trigger the operation of the normal electric accessory 522) is selected. In the present embodiment, the symbol A and the symbol B are assigned as the winning symbols of the normal symbols, while the symbol C is assigned as the losing symbol of the normal symbols.

The normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148 reads a normal symbol variation pattern random number value from the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, and refers to a normal symbol variation pattern table (not shown) to determine the normal symbol variation pattern. (variation time) is determined. The fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to "0.6 seconds" when the electric chew support function (normal symbol fluctuation time reduction function) is not operating, and the electric chew support function (normal symbol fluctuation time reduction function) is set to "0.2 seconds". Regardless of which normal symbol variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbols is set to "0.1 seconds". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is the time during which the normal symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained). In addition, in the normal design control, in order to reduce the processing load of the main control board 100, if the electric chew support function is not operating, the normal design hit probability is set to "0", and the normal design It is also conceivable to adopt a specification that makes the fluctuation time of .

In addition, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145 determines the opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric accessary 522 according to the result of the determination of whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate. The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 holds a normal electric accessory opening pattern table referred to when determining the opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric accessory 522 . The opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric accessory 522 is set to "0.2 seconds" when the electric chewing support function (opening extension function) is not operating, and the electric chewing support function (opening extension function) is set to "0.2 seconds". If activated, "5.8 seconds" is set. It should be noted that the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 522 may be different according to the type of the winning pattern of the normal pattern. For example, as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessories 522, when the electric chew support function (open extension function) is operating, if the hit pattern of the normal pattern is pattern A, "open for 3 seconds x 1 time → 2. 8 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5.8 seconds)”, and if the winning pattern of the normal symbol is symbol B, “2.8 seconds open x 1 time → 3 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5.8 seconds)” .8 seconds)”.

The special game control means 150, when the result of the winning/failure determination is a jackpot, according to the determined jackpot type (symbol group), the execution time (demonstration time) of the jackpot start demonstration and the jackpot end demonstration, and the round game Determine the execution time (round time). Then, the special game control means 150 instructs the performance control board 200 to execute a performance control command (referred to as a “jackpot start demo command”) for instructing execution of a jackpot start demonstration performance and a jackpot end demonstration performance. A performance control command (referred to as a "jackpot end demo command") is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. - 特許庁The jackpot start demo command is also a trigger for determining the contents of a series of jackpot middle effects (jackpot start demo effect, round effect, and jackpot end demo effect) developed during the jackpot game on the effect control board 200 side. Become. In addition, the special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as a "round effect designation command") for instructing the start of a round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the jackpot game. , is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . This round effect designation command includes information on the current number of rounds, information on opening and closing of the big winning opening 54, and the like. The execution time (demonstration time) of the jackpot start demonstration and the jackpot end demonstration (demonstration time) depends not only on the jackpot type (symbol group) but also on the same jackpot type (symbol group) according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won. Also, the execution time (demonstration time) of the jackpot start demonstration and the jackpot end demonstration may be different.

The symbol display control means 155 includes special symbol display control means 156 and normal symbol display control means 157 . The special symbol display control means 156 causes the first special symbol display device 71 to variably display the first special symbol according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and after the variation display, the first special symbol is definitely displayed. Let In addition, the special symbol display control means 156 variably displays the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 72 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and displays the second special symbol after the variation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (fluctuation time, fixed display time) relating to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180 . The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbol when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (that is, at the timing when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes "0"). To generate a production control command (referred to as a “variation stop command”). The normal symbol display control means 157 variably displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 75 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and definite-displays the normal symbol after the variable display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (fluctuation time, fixed display time) relating to the display of normal symbols. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180 .

In addition, the special symbol display control means 156 issues an effect control command (referred to as a "waiting demo command") that triggers the execution of a waiting demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period of time or more. This is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . "The game is interrupted for a predetermined period of time or longer" means that a period in which there is no special symbol operation pending ball and no variable display of special symbols continues for a predetermined period of time or longer. If the period in which no game ball is fired continues for a predetermined period of time or longer, or if the period in which no game ball enters any of the winning holes continues for a predetermined period of time or longer, the game will be interrupted for a predetermined period of time or longer. It is good also as a specification which continues.

The electric role product control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric role product solenoid 543 as a jackpot game process after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed when the result of the special symbol win/loss determination is a big hit, and a special electric role is performed. The object 542 is controlled to open and close according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the jackpot game, one opening and closing operation of the special electric accessory 542 is regarded as one round game (unit game), and the round game is continuously executed for the prescribed number of rounds. The electric accessory control means 160 holds a big winning opening counter for storing the number of times the special electric accessory 542 is activated (that is, the number of rounds being executed). Here, the operation end condition (unit game end condition) of the special electric accessory 542 in the jackpot game is that a game ball of a prescribed count (“10” in this embodiment) enters the big winning hole 54. Alternatively, the opening time of the big winning opening 54 has reached the opening limit time (“28 seconds”, “2 seconds” in this embodiment).

In addition, the electric role product control means 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric role product solenoid 523 when the result of the determination of whether or not the normal symbol corresponds to a hit, and the normal electric role product 522 (the second 2 Controls the opening and closing of the starting port 52). Here, as described above, the electric accessory control means 160 opens the normal electric accessory 522 for only 0.2 seconds in the low base state in which the electric chew support function (open extension function) is not activated. Then, in the high base state where the electric chew support function (open extension function) is operating, the normal electric accessory 522 is opened for 5.8 seconds. Here, the operation end condition of the normal electric accessory 522 is that a predetermined number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls enter the second start port 52, or that the second start port 52 The total open time has reached the open limit time (“0.2 seconds” or “5.8 seconds” in this embodiment).

The game state control means 165 refers to the above-mentioned game state setting table when the result of the winning judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big win, and determines the type of symbol related to the big win and the time of winning the big win. The game state after the end of the big win game is determined based on the game state of (1) and the game state after the end of the big win game is switched. In the present embodiment, as described above, there are multiple types of game states, such as a normal game state (low probability low base state), a time-saving game state (low probability low base state), and a potential game state (high probability low base state). , A variable probability game state (high probability high base state) is set, and one of a plurality of types of effect modes is alternatively set with reference to the game state setting table. Since the game state setting table has already been described, redundant description will be omitted here.

In addition, the game state control means 165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the end of the big win game based on the big win type (symbol group) when the big win game is executed, and the variation after the end of the big win game. Toggle pattern selection state. In this embodiment, selection state 1, selection state 2, selection state 3, selection state 4, selection state 5, and selection state 6 are set as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states, and the determined game state and One of a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states is alternatively set according to the type of jackpot, the number of times of variation display of special symbols, and the like. Since the variation pattern selection state has already been described, redundant description will be omitted here.

The game state control means 165 generates an effect control command (referred to as a "game state designation command") including the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information, and stores it in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store.

The error monitoring control means 170 monitors the input information of the I/O port circuit 104, and inspects the magnetic detection signal from the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor, the door/frame opening signal, and the like. , determines whether the gaming machine is in an error state. If it is in an error state, in order to instruct the error state production to the production control board 200, a production control command ("error production designation command") including the error information is requested. Although not shown in FIG. 4 and the like, the door opening switch is means for detecting whether or not the glass frame 5 is open, and the frame opening switch detects whether or not the front frame 2 is open. The back set open switch is means for detecting whether or not the back set board 30 is open. Also, the magnetic sensor and radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting so-called fraudulent gaming behavior.

The main information storage means 180 stores the random number information acquired in the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, the operation reservation ball information of the special symbol and the normal symbol, the game state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time) related to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game shortening function, electric chew support function) information, information on variation pattern selection status, information on the result of judging the success or failure of special symbols and normal symbols (big hit, lose), stop symbols (including symbol groups) related to special symbols and normal symbols Information, information on special symbols and normal symbols variation pattern (including variation addition pattern), information on big hit game (number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (number of openings per round game), etc.), special symbol display device 71, 72, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric accessory 542, information on the performance control command data, etc., and a predetermined storage for storing each information. have an area.

The command transmission/reception means 190 is configured to transmit various performance control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the performance control board 200 by a parallel transmission method when there is a command transmission request. It is Each effect control command has a 2-byte configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. Bit 7 of EVENT data is set to "0". When transmitting such information as valid information, a strobe signal is output at each transmission timing of MODE and EVENT. As a general rule, the effect control commands generated in each process are transmitted one command per interrupt period according to the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 .

As shown in FIG. 4, the effect control board 200 includes effect lottery random number generation means 210, effect control means 220, lamp control means 230, role control means 240, error effect control means 250, sub-main information storage means 260, command transmitting and receiving means 270; It should be noted that the above-described means in the effect control board 200, sub-main CPU201 arranged on the effect control board 200, ROM202, RAM203, hardware such as electronic circuits, and software such as control programs stored in the ROM202. It is a functional representation of something.

The effect lottery random number generating means 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by program processing of the sub-main CPU 201 . These random number counters play a role as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. The software random numbers include the pre-reading lottery random number used in the lottery of the pre-reading effect, the decorative pattern random number used in the lottery of the stop pattern of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern fluctuation pattern random number used in the lottery of the decorative pattern fluctuation pattern (sub-fluctuation pattern) random number), decorative design variation addition pattern random number used for the lottery of the variation addition pattern of the decorative design (sub-variation addition pattern random number), advance notice lottery random number used for the lottery of the notice effect, jackpot effect pattern used for the lottery of the jackpot effect pattern Random numbers, stage lottery random numbers used for stage transition lottery, etc. are included. These random numbers are updated using the remaining time when command analysis is not performed in the main processing of the effect control side described later (when the effect control command is not received from the main control board 100). do.

Effect generalizing means 220 includes effect mode control means 221 , pending information display control means 222 , prefetching notice control means 223 , fluctuation effect control means 224 , decoration pattern control means 225 , notice effect control means 226 and special game effect control means 227 . include.

Based on the game state designation command from the main control board 100, the production mode control means 221 controls the production mode ("game (also referred to as "production mode"). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, as a plurality of production modes, "normal mode", "oppression chance mode", "special mode", "gento rush mode", and "revenge mode" are set. One of a plurality of types of production modes is selectively set according to the game state (or variation pattern selection state) managed on the main control board 100 side and the number of times of variation display of special symbols. A variable performance corresponding to the set performance mode is executed. When one of the production modes is set, as a production (variable production) that suggests that you are staying in the production mode, a background image dedicated to the production mode (a background image that is displayed on the back of the decorative pattern) is displayed on the screen. ) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11 . Since the background image and the BGM are set differently for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode the player is currently staying in from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing. Details of the effect mode (game flow) will be described later.

The holding information display control means 222 has a first holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and a second holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol. have. Reservation information display control means 222, when receiving a pattern memory number command from main control board 100, updates (adds) the value of the corresponding counter based on the information on the number of operation reservation balls included in this command. On the other hand, when the hold information display control means 222 receives a variation start command from the main control board 100, that is, when the operation hold ball is digested, it updates (subtracts) the value of the corresponding counter. In addition, the pending information display control means 222 displays the number of active pending balls of the first special symbol on the pending image display section 710 of the effect display device 70 based on the values of the first pending ball number counter and the second pending ball number counter. and the number of pending images corresponding to the number of active pending balls of the second special symbol are displayed. In addition, the holding information display control means 222 switches to a holding image corresponding to the operation holding ball by digesting the operation holding ball (first operation holding ball) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It controls the display of the displayed changing image. In this embodiment, unless explicitly mentioned, the reserved image of the first special symbol and the reserved image of the second special symbol are simply referred to as "held image" without distinguishing between them, and the changing image of the first special symbol It may simply be referred to as a "fluctuation image" without distinguishing it from the fluctuation image of the second special symbol.

The pre-reading notice control means 223 executes a pre-reading determination (referred to as "pre-reading lottery") for the operation suspension ball to be the target of the pre-reading notice effect. The look-ahead notice effect is a so-called continuous notice effect that foretells the possibility of a jackpot winning or a high-expectation effect (such as a reach effect) occurring over one or more times of variable display before the operation reserve ball targeted for look-ahead is digested. is generated as an aspect of At this time, the pre-reading lottery is performed based on the information of the pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command from the main control board 100 . Here, when the pre-reading notice control means 223 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 100, it distinguishes between the information of the pre-determination result of the first special symbol and the information of the pre-determination result of the second special symbol, respectively Up to a predetermined upper limit number (4), they are temporarily stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in a form linked to the entry order of the pending balls. This look-ahead information storage area has the same configuration as the reservation storage area of the main control board 100, and the reservation 1 storage area (first reservation storage area), A reserved 2 storage area (second reserved storage area), a reserved 3 storage area (third reserved storage area), and a reserved 4 storage area (fourth reserved storage area) are provided. Each reservation storage area can store information on the result of propriety prior determination, information on the result of prior determination of pattern, and information on the result of prior determination of variation pattern as a set. The information of the pre-determination result is stored in the order of reservation 1 storage area, reservation 2 storage area, reservation 3 storage area, reservation 4 storage area, reservation 1 storage area, reservation 2 storage area, reservation 3 storage area, reservation 4. It is digested in order of storage area (first-in first-out principle). In addition, when the information of the preliminary judgment result in the reservation 1 storage area is digested, the information of the preliminary judgment result stored in the reservation 2 storage area, the reservation 3 storage area, and the reservation 4 storage area is stored in the storage area with the lower number. While shifting, clear the contents of the reserved 4 storage area to zero.

The variation effect control means 224 controls the variation process (effect A variable performance pattern (also referred to as a “sub-variation pattern”) that defines the process) is determined. The fluctuation effect control means 224 holds a sub-variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a sub-variation pattern (variation effect pattern), and refers to this sub-variation pattern table to select a plurality of types of sub-variation patterns. One sub-variation pattern corresponding to the main variation pattern (basic variation time) or a combination of the main variation pattern (basic variation time) and the main variation additional pattern (variation addition time) is selected by lottery from among them. (In this embodiment, the selection corresponds to the combination, but it may depend only on the main variation pattern). Here, on the side of the main control board 100, the main variation pattern of the symbol variation is determined, while on the side of the effect control board 200, the scenario of the effect display process is defined in detail based on the main variation pattern. A pattern is established. In this sub-variation pattern, the variation display mode of the decorative pattern, that is, the scenario of the series of effect display process from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the end of the variation is defined. Timing of occurrence is also specified as a time schedule. After determining the sub-variation pattern, the variation effect control means 224 determines the sub-variation addition pattern corresponding to the main variation addition pattern. Details of the sub-variation pattern and the sub-variation addition pattern will be described later.

In addition, the fluctuation effect control means 224 is triggered by the reception of the standby demonstration command from the main control board 100 until the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started after receiving the standby demonstration command (the next fluctuation start During the customer waiting period (until the command is received), for example, a standby demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) for reproducing a moving image for demonstration is executed. However, in the present embodiment, the standby demonstration effect is executed only when the effect mode is the normal mode. Details of the standby demonstration effect will be described later.

The decoration symbol control means 225 is based on the information (stop symbol information, game state information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100 and the variation effect pattern determined by the variation effect control means 224. The final combination of symbols to be stopped (left, middle, and right symbols) is determined by lottery. In this example, three pattern rows containing a plurality of types of decorative patterns are formed, and the decorative patterns are formed by identifying elements such as numbers. In addition, the decorative symbol control means 225 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when determining a combination of decorative symbol stop symbols (also referred to as a "stop symbol pattern") by lottery. The plurality of types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for big hits, a stop symbol pattern table for out of reach, and a stop symbol pattern table for non-out of reach. A stop pattern of the decorative pattern is formed as a combination of three patterns, and includes a ``stop pattern indicating a big win (big hit pattern)'' and a ``stop pattern indicating a loss (lost pattern)''. A jackpot pattern indicating a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "7, 7, 7") in which three identical odd-numbered patterns are aligned. A jackpot pattern indicating a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "2, 2, 2") in which three patterns of the same even number are aligned. In addition, as a modification, if the jackpot pattern when the jackpot is drawn in the normal mode (special mode) is the jackpot that triggers the transition to the phantom battle rush mode, three patterns with the same odd number are aligned. In the case of a combination of stop modes and a big win that triggers the transition to the suppression chance mode, it is desirable to combine three stop modes with the same even-numbered symbols. The reason is that the control chance mode is a production mode that hides whether the current game state is a time-saving game state or a probability variable game state, so as per the above principle, a big hit in the variable display in the normal mode (special mode) When a is generated, a jackpot pattern indicating a normal jackpot (combination of stop modes in which three patterns of the same even number are aligned) or a jackpot pattern indicating a specific jackpot (a stop pattern in which three patterns of the same odd number are aligned) This is because if the mode combination) is stopped and displayed, the game state after the shift (before shifting to the control chance mode) will be known to the player at that time. In addition, as another modified example, if a big hit occurs in the variable display of SP reach D in the battle mode (phantom battle rush mode, suppression chance mode, revenge mode) described later, the result of the battle production is victory. If the jackpot type suggested by is "16R specific jackpot", the combination of the stop mode (that is, the combination of symbols of the double order) in which three symbols of the same odd number or even number are complete (after that, "7. Once a combination of consecutive symbols other than 7, 7" is displayed (temporarily stopped), it may be changed to "7, 7, 7" and then stopped), the battle effect If the jackpot type suggested by the result of 2R being a loss is "2R normal jackpot", for example, the left and right patterns such as "2 1 2" and "6 5 6" match It is desirable to have a combination of out-of-reach patterns that differ only in medium symbols (visually the same as the out-of-reach symbols described later). However, for the battle mode (Gento rush mode, suppression chance mode, revenge mode) in this modification, "7 6 7" should not be stopped (in other words, the reach of "7" is always "7.7.7"). A winning pattern is a combination of stop patterns (for example, "1, 3, 8") in which at least one of the three patterns is a pattern with a number different from the other numbers. Here, out of the winning symbols, the reach-losing symbols are a combination of stop modes (for example, "3.1.3") in which only the middle symbols are shifted back and forth by several frames while the left and right symbols match. Become. In addition, in the case of a small winning pattern or a 2R big winning pattern even if it is a big winning pattern, there may be a combination of predetermined stop modes such as "3, 5, 7", for example. Also, if the lottery result is a non-reach out, a specific outcome called a so-called "chance eye" (for example, "1, 2, 3" or "5, 6, 7", etc. "2, 2, 3", "5, 5, 6", etc.) may be selected as the offset. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect, when performing temporary stop display and re-fluctuation display before final stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, a special symbol ( Pseudo consecutive pattern) is selected. In the case of displaying temporary stop symbols suggesting the occurrence of a pseudo-run, at least one stop symbol (typically a middle symbol) out of the stop symbols of the three rows of decorative symbols is displayed with characters such as "NEXT". There are cases where special symbols (pseudo-continuous symbols) are replaced and displayed (for example, "2 NEXT 3" or "2 NEXT 2"). The order of stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each variable effect pattern to be described later. In this embodiment, as a rule, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol→right symbol→middle symbol. However, in the case of the variation effect pattern of shortened variation in which the variation time is set to be extremely short, the left design, middle design, and right design can be stopped almost at the same time. Also, in the case of a special variable performance pattern, it is also possible to stop in the order of the right symbol -> middle symbol -> left symbol, and in this case the degree of expectation for a big hit tends to be relatively high. In addition, it is desirable that the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern start to fluctuate at the same time, regardless of the stop order. However, as a special variation effect pattern, the variation may be started in the order of left design, right design, and middle design, and in that case, the degree of expectation for big hit tends to be relatively high.

A notice performance control means 226 draws lots for notice performance patterns defining details of the notice performance executed at each stage of the variation process of the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variation performance pattern determined by the variation performance control means 224. - 特許庁determined by The notice performance patterns include performance patterns for temporarily or stepwise image display of specific character images, animations, etc., performance patterns for outputting specific sounds, performance patterns for operating movable accessories, and the like. The advance notice performance is executed in parallel with the variable display of the decorative pattern, and suggests in advance that the degree of reliability of the big win that the pattern fluctuation is stopped in the big win mode is high. The advance notice performance includes the advance notice performance executed before the ready-to-win state occurs (including when the ready-to-win state occurs) in the variable display process of the decorative pattern, and the notice performance to be executed after the ready-to-win state occurs. Each notice effect has a different hit reliability, and basically, the notice effect displayed after the occurrence of reach is relatively more expected than the notice effect displayed before the occurrence of reach. getting higher. A notice performance control means 226 holds a notice lottery table referred to when selecting a notice performance pattern for each kind of notice performance, and makes a notice corresponding to the kind of notice performance occurring along the scenario of the variable performance pattern. A lottery table is selected. Specific types of notice effects include, for example, comment notice effects, background notice effects, SU (step-up) notice effects, logo notice effects, mini character notice effects, group notice effects, and role notice effects. ing. This advance notice effect is basically performed by synthesizing display of one or a plurality of advance notice effects with the variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 70 . Therefore, even if the variable display of decorative symbols is performed by the same variable performance pattern, it is possible to generate various performance modes by combining with one or a plurality of advance notice performances.

The special game effect control means 227 determines the contents of the effect during the big win (big win effect pattern) for notifying that the big win game is in progress. The performance during the big win includes a start demonstration performance for notifying the start of the big win game, a round performance for notifying that the round game is in progress, and an end demonstration performance for notifying the end of the big win game. When the special game effect control means 227 receives a jackpot start demonstration command from the main control board 100, the special game effect control means 227, based on the information of the jackpot type stored in the sub-main information storage means 260, generates a effect pattern during the jackpot (start demo effect pattern, round effect pattern, end demo effect pattern) are determined. In this jackpot effect pattern, a start demonstration effect time, a round effect time (a effect time corresponding to the opening pattern of the big prize opening 54), and an end demo effect time are set, and a series of demonstration effects are set along the time axis. The contents of the production are set. In addition, the special game effect control means 227 executes the start demonstration effect upon receiving a jackpot start demonstration command from the main control board 100 according to the jackpot effect pattern, and each event upon receiving a round effect designation command. A round performance is executed, and the end demonstration performance is executed with the reception of a jackpot end demonstration command as a trigger. In the jackpot start demonstration effect, for example, the words "jackpot start" are displayed on the screen to announce the start of the jackpot game. In addition, in the round effect, for example, the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of prize balls won are displayed on the screen, and various images (animation images, etc.) that liven up the jackpot game are displayed. Then, in the jackpot end demonstration effect, for example, the characters "jackpot end" are displayed on the screen to announce the end of the jackpot game. Here, depending on whether the game state is a high base state or a low base state when the result of the win/loss determination related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot start demonstration time and the jackpot are determined. The start demonstration performance time and performance contents may be varied, and the jackpot end demonstration time and the jackpot end demonstration performance time and performance contents may be varied. Furthermore, when the result of the hit/fail judgment regarding the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the effect occurs when the game state is a low base state and does not occur when it is a high base state (for example, " Do your best from now on!" may be generated during the jackpot ending demonstration, and instead, the result of the success/failure determination relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes the big hit. A performance (for example, performance B in which the enemy character encourages ``It will continue!'') is generated during the jackpot end demonstration. You may let Furthermore, another effect (eg As such, an effect C) may be generated in which the characters "big hit + 1 time!" appear. In this case, the performance C can be generated if there is a big hit pending in the pending (maximum of four pending) related to the second special symbols scheduled to be consumed after the end of the big win ending demonstration. It is desirable that effect B can be generated without requiring such conditions. However, although it is not essential, it is desirable that both the effect B and the effect C occur only during the jackpot end demonstration of the special game related to the probability variable jackpot.

As described above, the effect control means 220 generates image control commands related to images and sounds based on the determined effect contents (prefetch effect pattern, variable effect pattern, advance notice effect pattern, stop symbol pattern, jackpot effect pattern, etc.), This is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 .

The lamp control means 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamps, the color of light emitted, etc. according to the content of the effect set by the effect generalizing means 220 . The lamp control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for lighting control of the effect lamps LP (the frame lamp 10, the board lamp 80), and the lamp data corresponding to the determined effect pattern. , and transmits this lamp control signal (lamp data) to the lamp connection board 91 .

The role control means 240 controls driving of each movable role 24 according to the content of the effect set by the effect control means 220 . The role control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for controlling the driving of the movable role 24, and transmits a drive control signal (driving data) corresponding to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. .

The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100, and to notify that an error state has occurred in the game machine according to the error effect pattern. there is

The sub-main information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store decorative pattern information, variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, control command information, and the like. It has a storage area. For example, the command storage area includes an effect control command buffer for storing effect control commands from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing image control commands for the image control board 300, and an image control board 300. includes an ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

The command transmission/reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 . Command transmitting/receiving means 270 generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal described above from the main control board 100, executes the reception interrupt processing of the production control command (details will be described later), and transmits various production control commands in this interrupt processing. It is designed to be acquired. In addition, when the command transmitting/receiving means 270 receives the strobe signal, the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command is preferentially performed over other interrupt processing (interrupt processing with a priority level less than 7, which will be described later). ing.

Also, the command transmitting/receiving means 270 is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 in order to instruct the execution of the effect contents (fluctuation effect pattern information, advance notice effect pattern information, decoration pattern information, etc.) set by the effect control means 220. The received image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 by serial communication. In principle, the image control commands are transmitted at predetermined intervals (500 μs in this example) according to the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 . Thereby, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 70 to variably display the effect image including the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. , the notice effect is displayed in the form of being superimposed on the design change effect at each stage of the variable display process. Furthermore, the command transmission/reception means 270 receives an ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300 and stores this ACK command in the ACK command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 .

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow of this embodiment will be described. As described above, FIG. 7 is a transition diagram of the game state and effect mode in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a normal mode, a suppression chance mode, a special mode, a phantom battle rush mode, and a revenge mode are set as a plurality of production modes.

<Normal mode>
First, when the pachinko game machine PM is powered on, the presentation mode is set to the normal mode, and the game is started from this normal mode. The normal mode is a production mode corresponding to the normal game state (low probability low base state). When the production mode is the normal mode, the frequency of the game balls entering the first start port 51 is set higher than the frequency of the game balls entering the second start port 52, so left-handed ( By shooting the game ball aiming at the left area PA1), the game ball is entered into the first starting port 51, and the judgment of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed mainly. It becomes playfulness. In this normal mode, if the result of the winning judgment of the first special symbol corresponds to the big hit, the first special symbol big hit type is "4R specific big hit 1 (symbol group A)" at 5%, "4R specific big hit 2 ( Symbol group B)” is 10%, “4R specific jackpot 3 (symbol group C)” is 20%, “4R specific jackpot 4 (symbol group D)” is 20%, and “4R specific jackpot 5 (symbol group E)”. is 10%, "4R normal jackpot 1 (symbol group F)" is 14%, "4R normal jackpot 2 (symbol group G)" is 14%, and "4R normal jackpot 3 (symbol group H)" is 7%. Occurs with probability. If the jackpot type is either "4R specific jackpots 1 to 4 (symbol groups A to D)" or "4R normal jackpots 1 to 3 (symbol groups F to H)", after the jackpot game ends, " Switch to Suppression Chance Mode. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "4R specific jackpot 5 (symbol group E)", after the jackpot game ends, the mode shifts to the phantom battle rush mode. Therefore, when the first special symbol jackpot is drawn in this normal mode, the game shifts to the "suppression chance mode" with a probability of 90%, and shifts to the "fantasy battle rush mode" with a probability of 10%.

<Control chance mode>
Control chance mode is a production mode corresponding to the time-saving gaming state (low probability high base state) or probability variable gaming state (high probability high base state), that is, the production mode corresponding to the high base state in which the electric chew support function is activated. be. When the production mode shifts to the suppression chance mode, the electric chew support function is activated, so that the ease of entry of the game ball into the second start port 52 is increased. The game ball is entered into the second starting port 52 by launching), and the game property of subjectively executing the validity determination of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol). In this suppression chance mode, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol corresponds to the big hit, as the second special symbol big hit type, "16R specific big hit 1 (symbol group I)" is 32.5%, "16R specific A 2R jackpot (symbol group J)” occurs with a probability of 32.5%, and a “2R normal jackpot (symbol group K)” occurs with a probability of 35%. If the jackpot type is any one of "16R specific jackpots 1 to 2 (symbol groups I, J)", after the jackpot game ends, the mode shifts to the "fantasy battle rush mode". On the other hand, when the jackpot type is the "2R normal jackpot (symbol group K)", the game shifts to the "revenge mode" after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, when the second special symbol jackpot is drawn in this oppression chance mode, there is a 65% probability that the mode will shift to the "Gento Rush Mode", and a 35% probability that the mode will shift to the "Revenge Mode".

In addition, the control chance mode continues until the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbols reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times after the end of the jackpot game. The upper limit number of times of the suppression chance mode is the same number of times as the number of fluctuation time reductions and the number of times of electric support, and the first special symbol jackpot type (the first special symbol jackpot type that triggered the shift to the suppression chance mode ), the upper limit number of times (20 times, 40 times, 60 times, 10000 times) is set. Specifically, the upper limit number of times of the suppression chance mode is when the jackpot type that triggered the transition to the suppression chance mode is "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A)" or "4R normal jackpot 1 (symbol group F)". If there is, "20 times" is set, and if it is "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B)" or "4R normal jackpot 2 (symbol group G)", "40 times" is set and "4R specific jackpot 3 (symbol group C)" or "4R normal jackpot 3 (symbol group H)", "60 times" is set, and "4R special jackpot 4 (symbol group D)" is set to "10000 times". is set. Then, in this suppression chance mode, the suppression chance is triggered when the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbols reaches the upper limit number of times (20 times, 40 times, 60 times, 10000 times) without the occurrence of the next big hit. When the mode ends, you will be transferred to a special mode.

<Special mode>
The special mode is a production mode corresponding to the normal game state (low probability low base state) or latent game state (high probability low base state), that is, the production corresponding to the low base state in which the electric chew support function is not operating mode. As described above, this special mode is set when the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches a predetermined upper limit number in the suppression chance mode (set after exiting the power supply state). When the production mode is a special mode, the frequency of game balls entering the first start port 51 is set higher than the frequency of game balls entering the second start port 52, so left-handed ( By shooting the game ball aiming at the left area PA1), the game ball is entered into the first starting port 51, and the judgment of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed mainly. It becomes playfulness. In this special mode, when the result of the judgment of whether the first special symbol corresponds to a big hit, the first special symbol big hit type is "4R specific big hit 1 (symbol group A)" 5%, "4R specific big hit 2 ( Symbol group B)” is 10%, “4R specific jackpot 3 (symbol group C)” is 20%, “4R specific jackpot 4 (symbol group D)” is 20%, and “4R specific jackpot 5 (symbol group E)”. is 10%, "4R normal jackpot 1 (symbol group F)" is 14%, "4R normal jackpot 2 (symbol group G)" is 14%, and "4R normal jackpot 3 (symbol group H)" is 7%. Occurs with probability. In the special mode, the game state set after the end of the big win game can differ depending on the game state (normal game state, hidden game state) at the time of winning the big win. That is, when the game state at the time of this jackpot winning is the normal game state, the jackpot types of the first special symbol are "4R specific jackpots 1 to 4 (symbol groups A to D)" and "4R normal jackpots 1 to 3 (symbols Groups F to H)", after the jackpot game is over, it shifts to the "suppression chance mode", and the jackpot type of the first special pattern is "4R specific jackpot 5 (symbol group E)". In that case, after the end of the big hit game, it shifts to the "Gento Rush Mode". On the other hand, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent game state, the jackpot types of the first special symbols are "4R specific jackpots 1 to 3 (symbol groups A to C)" and "4R normal jackpots 1 to 3 ( pattern groups F to H)”, after the jackpot game is over, it shifts to the “control chance mode”, and the jackpot type of the first special pattern is “4R specific jackpot 4, 5 (symbol group D, E)", after the big win game is over, the mode shifts to the "Gento Rush Mode". In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, according to the game state when the result of the judgment result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the number of subsequent high base states (the number of fluctuation time reductions) is different. Even if the pattern that triggers the transition to "suppression chance mode" is the same (especially, the jackpot type of the first special pattern is "4R specific jackpot 1 to 3 (symbol group A to C)"), that mode The number of times of staying is different according to the game state when the result of the success/failure determination of the first special symbol is a big hit.

In addition, when the game state in the special mode is the normal game state, when the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbols reaches 10 times without the occurrence of the next big win, the next fluctuation display is shifted to the normal mode. . On the other hand, when the game state in the special mode is the latent game state, even when the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches 10 times without the next big hit occurring, normal It does not shift to the mode and stays in the special mode until the next big hit occurs. Therefore, the current game state is kept secret from immediately after the transition to the special mode until the variable display of 10 rotations is completed. Further, in the present embodiment, during the 10-rotation variable display immediately after shifting to the latent probability mode, the remaining number of times notification effect for informing the remaining number of times until the 10-rotation variable display is completed, and the 10-rotation variable display are performed. After the end of , a mode branch effect is executed to suggest whether the special mode should be continued or terminated. Details of the remaining number of times notification effect and the mode branch effect will be described later.

<Gento Rush Mode>
The phantom battle rush mode is an effect mode corresponding to the probability variation gaming state (high probability high base state). When the production mode shifts to the phantom battle rush mode, the electric chew support function is activated, so that the ease of entering the game ball into the second start port 52 is increased, ), the game ball is entered into the second starting port 52, and the second special symbol's suitability determination (variation display of the second special symbol) is performed independently.
In this phantom battle rush mode, when the result of the winning judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to the big hit, as the second special symbol big hit type, "16R specific big hit 1 (symbol group I)" is 32.5%, "16R A special jackpot 2 (symbol group J)” occurs with a probability of 32.5%, and a “2R normal jackpot (symbol group K)” occurs with a probability of 35%. If the jackpot type of the second special symbol is any one of "16 specific jackpots 1 to 2 (symbol groups I, J)", after the jackpot game ends, the mode shifts to the "fantasy battle rush mode" again. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the second special symbol is "2R normal jackpot (symbol group K)", after the jackpot game ends, the mode falls to the "revenge mode". It should be noted that this phantom battle rush mode continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches "1000 times" (that is, substantially until the next big hit occurs).

<Revenge Mode>
The revenge mode is an effect mode corresponding to the time-saving gaming state (low-probability high-base state). When the production mode shifts to the revenge mode, the electric chew support function is activated, so that the ease of entering the game ball into the second start port 52 is increased, so it is possible to shoot the game ball aiming at the right side area PA2. By causing the game ball to enter the second starting port 52, it becomes a game characteristic of subjectively executing the validity judgment of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol). In this revenge mode, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol corresponds to the big hit, the second special symbol big hit type is "16R specific big hit 1 (symbol group I)" at 32.5% and "16R specific big hit". 2 (symbol group J)" with a probability of 32.5%, and "2R normal jackpot (symbol group K)" with a probability of 35%. When the jackpot type of the second special symbol is any one of "16 specific jackpots 1 to 2 (symbol groups I, J)", after the jackpot game ends, the mode shifts to the phantom battle rush mode. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the second special symbol is "2R normal jackpot (symbol group K)", after the jackpot game ends, the mode shifts to the revenge mode again. In addition, this revenge mode continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches "100 times". Therefore, when the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches 100 times without the occurrence of the next big win in the revenge mode, the revenge mode is terminated and the next variable display is shifted to the normal mode.

≪Battle Mode≫
In this embodiment, among the plurality of types of production modes, the production mode in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game is configured as a battle mode in which a battle production in which a friendly character battles an enemy character is developed. there is That is, when the production mode is the battle mode, when the variable display develops into the SP reach, a battle production is developed in which the ally character fights against the enemy character to decide victory or defeat. In this embodiment, the "suppression chance mode", the "fantasy battle rush mode", and the "revenge mode" correspond to the battle mode. In this battle mode, the winning of the jackpot is confirmed at the time when the game develops into the SP reach (when the battle production is started). Then, according to the effect result of the battle effect (battle win/lose), the type of big win is suggested or notified. That is, as a result of the battle production, when the ally character wins over the enemy character, a specific jackpot (“4R specific jackpot” in the variable display of the first special symbol, and “16R specific jackpot” in the variable display of the second special symbol) is confirmed. Then, when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, a normal jackpot ("4R normal jackpot" in the variable display of the first special symbol, and "2R normal jackpot" in the variable display of the second special symbol) is determined. Details of the battle production will be described later.

≪Irregular transition (1) at the time of accident occurrence in normal mode≫
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, when the production mode currently being executed is the normal mode, the production mode shifts from the normal mode to the revenge mode when a predetermined special transition condition is met. The "special transition condition" means that (in the normal mode) the result of the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is successful is a big hit (that is, a so-called accidental hit occurs). That is, when the production mode is the normal mode (including the normal mode immediately after turning on the power), if it is originally, the determination of the validity of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol) should be the main part of the game. However, if the game ball enters the second start port 52 in spite of the low base state, the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit (so-called accident hit), or if the high base state is low. Immediately before shifting to the base state, one or more reserves related to the second special design remain, and as a result of the reserve being digested in the low base state, the result of the judgment of the second special design is a big hit (this event is also If the jackpot type of the second special symbol is any of “16R specific jackpot 1”, “16R specific jackpot 2”, and “2R normal jackpot”, the second At the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the performance mode is shifted from the normal mode to the revenge mode, and the variable display of the second special symbol (variable display of the big hit) is executed in the revenge mode.

To outline the reason, first, the variation performance of the jackpot in the normal mode is that the result of the judgment of the first special symbol, which is the main part of the game in the normal mode, is a jackpot, and if any jackpot type is won. Even so, it is designed on the assumption that a predetermined number (4 rounds x 10 count x 15 = 600) of prize balls can be won in the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the second special pattern jackpot occurs in the normal mode, if the jackpot type is the 2R normal jackpot, the expected value of prize ball acquisition in the jackpot game is substantially zero (or some prize ball acquisition). There may be an expected value, but 2 rounds x 10 counts x 15 = 300 acquisition is at least an expected value that can not be expected), and the content of the variation production of the big hit in the normal mode (for example, the result of the SP reach production) 2R normal jackpot (0 prize balls) despite the fact that the success effect is generated to notify that there is an opportunity to win a prize ball). A discrepancy occurs between the content and the game result (profit mode), which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable or distrustful. In other words, the jackpot type of the second special pattern (16R specific jackpot, 2R normal jackpot) was originally designed assuming a variable production based on the battle specs, and as a result of the variable production in the revenge mode It is suitable to use. Therefore, when the second special pattern jackpot is drawn when the currently executed production mode is the normal mode, the production mode is changed to the normal mode at the start of the variable display of the second special pattern jackpot irregularly. It is designed to shift from to revenge mode (battle mode).

However, although the production mode shifts to the revenge mode (production mode corresponding to the time-saving gaming state), internally the game state remains the normal game state, and the variation pattern selection state is the selection corresponding to the time-saving gaming state. Instead of the state 6, the selection state 1 corresponding to the normal game state is maintained. Therefore, under the variation pattern (variation time) selected in this selection state 1, in order to execute the variation production (battle spec) in the revenge mode, variation at the time of the second special symbol big hit in this selection state 1 The pattern selection tendency is set to be the same as the variation pattern selection tendency at the time of the second special symbol jackpot in the selection state 6 (revenge mode). That is, the variation pattern (variation time) at the time of the second special symbol jackpot in the selection state 1 is constructed on the premise that the variation display is performed in the revenge mode instead of the normal mode as the production mode. Therefore, even if the performance mode is irregularly shifted from the normal mode to the revenge mode when a big hit with the second special pattern occurs in the normal mode, a discrepancy or contradiction is caused between the content of the performance and the game result. Therefore, before and after the transition to the production mode, the game production can be smoothly performed without making the player feel uncomfortable or distrustful.

≪Irregular transition (2) at the time of accident occurrence in normal mode≫
In this embodiment, the number of continuations of the revenge mode is set to "100 times" as the number of times of variable display of special symbols, and the number of times of variable display of special symbols is set without the occurrence of the next big hit during execution of the revenge mode. When reaching "100 times", the production mode falls from the revenge mode to the normal mode. When the production mode falls to the normal mode, this normal mode is the production mode set when the game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state), so if it is originally, the propriety of the first special symbol Judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) should be the main part of the game, but immediately after falling from the revenge mode to the normal mode, the second special symbol that occurred during the execution of the revenge mode (time saving game state) There is a high possibility that the operation retention ball remains, and the operation retention ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation retention ball of the first special symbol. It can be said that this is a situation in which variable display of patterns is likely to be performed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, in the first rotation fluctuation display immediately after the revenge mode ends, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit (that is, if the above special transition condition is satisfied ), as described above, the revenge mode is continued without switching the presentation mode from the revenge mode to the normal mode (without ending the revenge mode) at the start of the variable display. In other words, when the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches "100 times" in revenge mode, it should fall to normal mode. When the big win is drawn, the revenge mode is continued as it is, and the big win of the second special symbol is generated in the revenge mode of substantially the 101st rotation. As a result, the revenge mode can be continued beyond the original upper limit number of times (100 times), and despite the fact that the jackpot occurred after falling into the normal game state internally, it is in a pseudo time-saving game state. It is possible to make it look as if a big hit has occurred when the is continuing (it is assumed that the state of consecutive villas continues in a pseudo manner). Here, when the variable display of the first rotation immediately after the end of the revenge mode is the variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of whether or not the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big hit, the game falls to the normal mode.

≪Renso Information≫
In the RAM 203 of the effect control board 200, predetermined consecutive house information is stored as effect information to be notified about the current game situation and effect state. The consecutive villa information is basically performance information set corresponding to a jackpot consecutive villa state. This consecutive game information is a useful judgment material for the player to know the current game situation and presentation state. Here, the continuous game state is a game state in a non-special game state, after the occurrence of the first hit that triggers the transition from the non-specific game state to the specific game state, without returning to the non-specific game state. It refers to the state in which the state continues (the state in which the jackpot in the specific game state occurs continuously). In addition, the specific game state is a game state in which the probability of transition to a special game is increased compared to the normal game state. A game state in which any one of the functions is activated. In addition, in this embodiment, the specific game state means a game state in which at least the electric chew support function is operating, that is, a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game.

The consecutive game information includes "selected character information", "information on the number of winning balls", "information on the number of consecutive games", "special movie information", "special performance information", "music opening information", and the like. The "selected character information" is information on characters (ally characters) selected by the player before or at the start of the consecutive villas as characters that appear in various effects during the consecutive villas. The "acquired ball number information" is information on the number of prize balls (cumulative number) acquired during the consecutive game state. "Consecutive game number information" is information on the number of consecutive big wins during the continuous game state (the number of consecutive big wins that trigger a transition to the specific game state). The “special performance 1 information” is information on the number of consecutive jackpots during a series of games, which triggers execution of the special performance 1 . In addition, the special effect 1 is when the same character selected by the player wins the battle effect a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) during the continuous game state (however, the 16R specific jackpot is selected as the jackpot type of the second special symbol). A story production (special movie) related to the character that is executed under certain conditions). The “special performance 2 information” is information on the number of consecutive jackpots during the consecutive games, which triggers execution of the special performance 2 . It should be noted that the special effect 2 is executed when the battle effect is won a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) in the continuous state (provided that the 16R specific jackpot is the jackpot type of the second special symbol). This is an effect in which highly rare premier characters are displayed one by one in order. The special effect 2 is a permanent effect independent of the character, while the special effect 1 is a character-specific effect dependent on the character selected by the player. The "song release information" is information on the number of consecutive jackpots during a series of games, which triggers the release of a new song. In this embodiment, each time the battle production is won a prescribed number of times (for example, once) (provided that the jackpot type of the second special symbol is a 16R jackpot), a new song is released one by one. The player can select this newly released song in addition to the fixed songs (for example, 3 songs) that can be selected from the first hit. Here, the player may not be able to select this song, and it may be output according to the continuous state (that is, when the song release condition is satisfied, the released song is automatically played when the condition is satisfied). ).

In this embodiment, the consecutive villa information (the number of consecutive villas) is updated according to the presentation mode information (background information, presentation stage information) currently being executed. That is, in the present embodiment, until the production mode falls to the normal mode (until the production mode exits the phantom battle rush mode, revenge mode, suppression chance mode, or special mode), the continuous villa information is updated, and the production mode is Clear (reset) Renso information when falling to normal mode (However, special modes are an exception, and Renso information is updated until the production mode exits Gento rush mode, revenge mode, and suppression chance mode. ). Then, exceptionally, when the jackpot with the second special symbol is drawn in the first rotation immediately after the revenge mode ends, the game state actually falls to the normal game state (the continuous game state ends). However, the production mode continues the revenge mode without falling to the normal mode, and maintains the information on the multiple villas without clearing the information on the multiple villas, and simulates the appearance of the multiple villas. shall be continued indefinitely. In this way, by managing various types of revolver information based on the performance mode information instead of the game state information, discrepancies arise between the performance mode (background screen) and the revolver information, and the player feels uncomfortable and distrustful. It prevents situations that cause

At this time, when the consecutive game state is actually ended based on the end of the revenge mode (the game state falls to the normal state), the external information terminal board 600 is pulled out of the machine with the end of the revenge mode as a trigger. As an external information signal to be output to the external device (data display, hall computer), the continuous signal is no longer output (off output). Therefore, even if the jackpot of the second special symbol is drawn in the fluctuation display of the first rotation immediately after the revenge mode is finished, the consecutive game signal from the external information terminal board 600 that has been continuously output until the revenge mode is finished is temporarily output. It will be interrupted (the output will be turned off once), and then the output will be started again with the big hit as a trigger. A signal during a continuous game is a signal indicating that the game is in a continuous game state as the word indicates. When it becomes, the output is started with the execution of the special game as a trigger, and in the high base state and the high base state that shifts after that, the result of the success/failure determination related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a big hit. This is a signal that is continuously output during execution of a special game executed by , and ends the output when the game state shifts to a low base state as a game state during a non-special game.

[Various productions]
In the pachinko game machine PM having such a configuration, various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress of the game, etc., as described above. . Below, among the various game effects, "special effect", "hold change effect", "battle effect", "meter effect", "base control effect", "remaining number of times notification effect", "mode branch effect" Explain the contents.

[Special production]
A special effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 16 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of special effects. The special effect is configured as a preliminary effect before the pseudo variation (pseudo 2 variation, pseudo 3 variation) is performed during the execution of the variation display when the presentation mode is the normal mode (including the special mode). . The element effects that make up this special effect are roughly classified into a "fellow participation effect", an "aura use effect", and an "aura connection effect". Therefore, the special effects are configured by combining one or more types of such element effects. Here, the types of companion entry effects are broadly classified into a "one friend participation effect" in which one friend character participates and a "two companion participation effect" in which two fellow characters participate in the game at the same time. The types of aura connection effects are roughly classified into a "musou connection effect" in which the auras of two fellow characters are connected, and an "ultimate connection effect" in which the auras of three fellow characters are connected. The type of aura use effect is roughly divided into "normal aura use effect" in which a companion character's aura is used to perform a normal attack, and "special aura use effect" in which a companion character's aura is used to perform a special attack. be. Details of each element effect will be described later.

<Variation additional information>
The special effect is a effect executed based on the variable additional information (sub-expanded variable additional information) specified by the sub-variable additional pattern. In this embodiment, the basic pattern of the special effect is specified by the main variation addition pattern, and the detailed pattern of the special effect is specified by the sub-variation addition pattern. That is, the main variation addition pattern is a basic pattern of special effects that defines a scenario including the number of times each elemental effect is executed, the order of execution, etc., as a general flow of the special effects. The sub-variation addition pattern is a special effect detailed pattern that defines the scenario of each element effect including the execution timing of each element effect based on the number of times and execution order of each element effect specified by the main change addition pattern. becomes.

In this embodiment, the basic patterns and detailed patterns of the special effects are divided into four hierarchies and drawn in order. That is, in the present embodiment, as the four hierarchical structures, the first hierarchy (main fluctuation pattern) → second hierarchy (main fluctuation additional pattern) → third hierarchy (sub fluctuation pattern) → fourth
A basic pattern and a detailed pattern of a special effect are determined by performing a lottery for the effect in the order of layers (sub-variation addition patterns). Lottery processing is performed by the main control board 100 for the first layer and the second layer, and lottery processing is performed by the effect control board for the third layer and the fourth layer. Here, since the main variation pattern (first layer) has already been described in detail, the main variation addition pattern (second layer), sub-variation pattern (third layer) and sub-variation addition pattern (third layer) will be described below. 4 layers) will be mainly described. In addition, since this special effect is a effect that is performed when the game state is the normal game state (or the latent game state), in the following description, the main variation pattern (variation The contents of the processing in each layer will be described for the main variation additional pattern, the sub variation pattern, and the sub variation addition pattern corresponding to the main variation pattern defined in the pattern table 1).

(Main fluctuation addition pattern)
First, the main variation addition pattern in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the main variation pattern, the main variation addition table, and the main variation addition pattern. The main fluctuation patterns PH1-1 to 1-13 and PA1-1 to 1-14 in the drawing correspond to the main fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table 1 of FIG. 10 described above. As shown in FIG. 17, each of the main variation patterns PH1-1 to 1-13 and PA1-1 to 1-14 is associated with one of a plurality of types of main variation addition tables A to F. . Further, to each of the main variation addition tables A to F, one or a plurality of types of main variation addition patterns that are candidates for selection among the eight types of main variation addition patterns 1 to 8 are assigned. One main variation addition pattern is selected by lottery from among one or more types of main variation addition patterns 1 to 8. It should be noted that in the figure, for the sake of convenience, the numbers used for the lottery are omitted, but in reality, for each of the main variation addition tables A to F, the obtained lottery random number (special symbol variation addition pattern random number) Then, the determination number (range of lottery random number) for determining the main variation addition patterns 1 to 8 is set, and the lottery random number (special symbol variation addition pattern random number) is set to any determination number. One main variation addition pattern is selected from one or a plurality of types of main variation addition patterns 1 to 8 associated with each of the main variation addition tables A to F based on the belonging.

The upper part of FIG. 17 shows the correspondence between the main variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-13 for loss, the main variation addition tables A to F, and the main variation addition patterns 1 to 8. FIG. For example, main variation addition table A is associated with main variation patterns PH1-1, 1-2, 1-5, 1-6, and 1-7, and only main variation addition pattern 1 is a selection candidate. identified. Main variation additional pattern B is associated with main variation patterns PH1-3 and PH1-4, and main variation additional patterns 1 and 2 are identified as selection candidates. The main variation addition table C is associated with the main variation patterns PH1-8 and PH1-9, and the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3 and 7 are identified as selection candidates. The main variation addition table D is associated with the main variation patterns PH1-10, and the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, and 8 are identified as selection candidates. The main variation addition table E is associated with the main variation patterns 1-11 and 1-12, and the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 5 and 7 are identified as selection candidates. The main variation addition table F is associated with the main variation patterns 1-13, and all the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 are identified as selection candidates. .

The lower part of FIG. 17 shows the correspondence between the main variation patterns PA1-1 to 1-14 for the big win, the main variation addition tables A to F, and the main variation addition patterns 1 to 8. For example, the main variation addition table A is associated with the main variation patterns PA1-1 to 1-3 and 1-10 to 1-14, and only the main variation addition pattern 1 is identified as a selection candidate. A main variation addition table C is associated with the main variation patterns PA1-4 to PA1-5, and main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, and 7 are identified as selection candidates. Main variation addition table D is associated with main variation patterns PA1-6, and main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, and 8 are identified as selection candidates. A main variation addition table E is associated with the main variation patterns PA1-7 to PA1-8, and main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 5, and 7 are identified as selection candidates. A main variation addition table F is associated with the main variation patterns PA1-9, and all the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 are identified as selection candidates. .

In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, each main variation addition table A to F is configured as a common main variation addition table without distinguishing between the one for winning and the one for big hit. It is preferable to divide into main variation addition tables A to F for losing and variation addition pattern tables A' to F' for big wins. That is, the main variation addition tables A to F for winning and the main variation addition tables A' to F' for big wins have the same types of main variation addition patterns that are candidates for selection, respectively. It is desirable to make the determination number (selection rate) different between the game and the game so that the high-expectation special effect (element effect) is more likely to be selected for the big win than for the win. For example, common main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, and 7 are assigned to the main variation addition table C for winning and the main variation addition pattern table C' for big win, respectively, as main variation addition patterns for selection candidates. The main variation addition table C for the main variation makes it easy to select the main variation addition pattern 2 with a relatively low degree of expectation for the big win, and the main variation addition table C' for the big win makes it easy to add the main variation with a relatively high degree of expectation for the big win. It is possible to configure the pattern 3 (a pattern in which a “musou connection” which is an effect with a high expectation of a big hit) can be easily selected. Since selection candidates for the main variation addition pattern cannot be determined for any of the main variation addition patterns A and A', only a single main variation addition pattern A should be prepared in practice. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is sufficient to prepare a total of 11 types of main variation addition tables A to F for losing and main variation addition tables A, B' to F' for big wins. Become. In addition, in the main variation addition table A, only the main variation addition pattern 1, which will be described later, is a selection candidate. Since it means that it is not provided (no special effect is performed), as a modified example, it is not necessary to provide the main variation addition table A and the main variation addition pattern 1 in the first place. The types of the main variation addition table may be only B to F, and in each table, it is preferable to select the main variation addition pattern (selection candidate) shown in FIG. 17 excluding the main variation addition pattern 1 as the selection candidate. be. In this modification, when a main variation pattern to which variation addition is possible is selected and a lottery to determine whether or not to perform variation addition is won, the main variation addition table (B to F) corresponding to the main variation pattern ), the main variation addition pattern may be selected.

Next, FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram for explaining the main variation addition pattern. In this embodiment, as described above, a total of eight types of main variation addition patterns 1 to 8 are prepared. Variation addition information (variation addition time) different from each other is defined for the main variation addition patterns 1 to 8 . In the figure, the value of the variation addition time specified by the type of the main variation addition patterns 1 to 8 is omitted, but in reality, one variation addition is provided for each of the main variation addition patterns 1 to 8. time is associated. This variation addition time has different time values depending on the types of the main variation addition patterns 1-8. In the present embodiment, the number of executions of each element effect (friend participation effect, aura use effect, aura connection effect) and the like are specified by this variable additional information (variable additional time). In the figure, for example, as the variation addition information of the main variation addition pattern 7, "[friend] 2 [use] 1 [connection] 0" indicates that the number of executions of the friend participation effect is 2 and the number of times of the aura use effect is 1. times, it means that the number of executions of the aura connection effect is 0 times. In addition, as the variation additional information of the main variation addition pattern 1, "[Naka] 0 [use] 0
[Connection] 0” means that the number of executions of the companion entry effect, the aura use effect, and the aura connection effect are all 0 (that is, none of the element effects are performed). Therefore, in the main variation addition pattern 1, "0 second" is set as the pattern variation addition time, which means that the special performance is not provided (the special performance is not performed). Therefore, the main variation pattern (the main variation pattern to which the main variation addition table A is assigned) for which only the main variation addition pattern 1 is a selection candidate is a main variation pattern in which no special effects are executed. In addition, for each of the seven main variation addition patterns 2 to 8, examples are "8 seconds", "12 seconds", "16 seconds", "20 seconds", "14 seconds", and "18 seconds". , and 22 seconds may be set. In addition, with regard to the flow of main variation addition patterns and special effects, in order to realize more diverse effects, there are not only the types shown in FIG. It's okay.

In addition, the figure shows the flow of the special effect corresponding to each variable additional information. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, since there are certain rules for developing each elemental effect such as the order of participation of fellow characters, the connection condition of auras, the order of using auras, etc., the number of executions of each elemental effect is If is decided, the rough flow of the special production will be decided. However, the execution timing of each element effect (at what number of pseudo-variations each element effect is performed) is specified by a sub-variation addition pattern (described later in detail) that is a sub-development of this main variation addition pattern. Become.

Although not shown, only the main variation addition table A is associated with the main variation patterns defined in the special symbol variation pattern tables 2 to 6 in FIGS. That is, when selecting the main variation pattern with reference to the variation pattern tables 2 to 6, no matter which main variation pattern is selected, only the main variation addition table A is associated, always the main variation addition pattern 1 are only candidates for selection. The reason for this is that the variation pattern tables 2 to 6 are variation pattern tables that are set corresponding to the game state (performance mode) in which special effects are not performed, so the variable additional time (special effect effect This is because "0 seconds" needs to be set as the time scale (only main variation addition pattern 1 needs to be selected). Also, as described above, as a modification, when the main variation addition table A and the main variation addition pattern 1 are not provided in the first place, when selecting the main variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern tables 2 to 6 , the main variation addition pattern should not be selected in the first place.

(Sub fluctuation pattern)
Next, sub-variation patterns in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram showing a sub-variation pattern table for losing, and FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing a sub-variation pattern table for big wins. Each sub-variation pattern table defines the corresponding relationship between the main variation pattern, the main variation addition table, the main variation addition pattern, and the sub-variation pattern. In this embodiment, one or more types of sub-variation patterns are associated with a combination of one main variation pattern and one main variation additional pattern. Specifically, when one main variation additional pattern is determined for one main variation pattern, one of one or more types of sub variation patterns corresponding to the combination of this main variation pattern and the main variation additional pattern is selected. One sub-fluctuation pattern will be selected by lottery. That is, the sub-variation pattern is determined based on the combination of the main variation pattern and the main variation addition pattern. As a modification, one main variation pattern may be associated with one or more types of sub variation patterns (that is, not in combination with the main variation additional pattern).

Here, for the main variation patterns (main variation patterns PH1-1 to 1-4, 1-7, 1-10, 1-13) without branching effects such as reach effects and fanning effects, one sub-variation pattern is associated only with On the other hand, for the main variation patterns (main variation patterns PH1-5 to 1-6, 1-8 to 1-9, 1-11 to 1-12) with branching effects such as reach effects and fanning effects, multiple types sub-variation patterns are associated. For example, two sub-variation patterns PH1-5-1 and PH1-5-2 are associated with a main variation pattern PH1-5 having a branching effect. More specifically, this main fluctuation pattern PH1-5 is defined to develop into SP reach A or SP reach B after establishment of reach, and as a sub fluctuation pattern associated with it, a sub fluctuation pattern In PH1-5-1, SP reach A is defined as a development destination, and in sub-variation pattern PH1-5-2, SP reach B is defined as a development destination. In other words, when the branching of the production is set in the main variation pattern, the type of production of the branch destination (for example, the type of SP reach of the development destination, etc.) is determined in the sub-variation pattern. In other words, one main variation pattern PH1-5 is configured to cover two types of SP reach candidates, and the sub variation pattern associated with it specifies which SP reach. It's becoming

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the type of SP reach is related to the type (the number of characters) of companion characters that appear in the companion war effect. Among the multiple types of reach effects, SP reach A is a reach effect in which one companion character A appears, SP reach B is a reach effect in which two companion characters A and B appear, and SP reach C is a reach effect. This is a ready-to-win production in which three fellow characters A, B, and C appear. If the companion entry effect is performed before developing into the SP reach A to C, it is guaranteed that the companion characters participating in this companion entry effect will also appear in the SP reach. That is, among the three fellow characters, at least the fellow characters who have participated in the fellow warfare presentation also appear in the SP reach (the number of fellow characters participating in the fellow warfare presentation ≤ the number of fellow characters appearing in the SP reach story). . Therefore, the sub-variation pattern that develops into SP reach A (including the sub-variation pattern that develops into SP reach C via SP reach A) is variable additional information (main variable additional pattern 1) or 1 It is associated with the variation additional information (main variation addition pattern 2) in which only one companion character participates, and is not associated with the variation addition information (main variation addition patterns 3 to 8) in which multiple companion characters participate. . Sub-variation patterns that develop into SP reach B (including sub-variation patterns that develop into SP reach C via SP reach B) are variable additional information (main variable additional pattern 1 to 7), and is not associated with the variation additional information (main variation addition pattern 8) in which three fellow characters participate in the war. The sub-variation pattern that develops into SP reach C (excluding the sub-variation pattern that develops into SP reach C via SP reach A or SP reach B) is all variation additions in which 1 to 3 fellow characters participate It is associated with information (main variation addition patterns 1 to 8). Therefore, for example, the main variation patterns PH1-8 are associated with the main variation addition table C, and the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, and 7 are assigned to the main variation addition table C. Of the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, and 7, sub variation patterns 1-8-1 (SP reach A), 1-8-2 (SP reach B) are candidates for selection, while sub-variation patterns are selected for main variation additional patterns 3 and 7 (variation additional information in which a plurality of companion characters participate). Only 1-8-2 (SP Reach B) is a selection candidate. In this embodiment, it is configured so that selection candidates for the sub-variation pattern (SP reach type) may differ depending on the main variation addition pattern combined with the main variation pattern.

(Sub-fluctuation addition pattern)
Next, the sub-variation addition pattern in this embodiment will be described. 21 and 22 are schematic diagrams showing sub-variation addition pattern tables for losing, and FIGS. 23 and 24 are schematic diagrams showing sub-variation addition pattern tables for big wins. In the present embodiment, as described above, the execution timing of each element effect and the like are specified as a detailed pattern obtained by sub-expanding the basic pattern of the special effect, using this sub-variation addition pattern.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, in the sub-variation addition pattern table, correspondence relationships between sub-variation patterns, main variation addition patterns, and sub-variation addition patterns are defined. In this embodiment, one or more types of sub-variation addition patterns are associated with each of the main variation addition patterns 1 to 8, and any one of the one or more types of sub-variation addition patterns An additional pattern is selected by lottery. In the figure, for the sake of convenience, the numerical values used for the lottery are omitted. ) is set, and one sub-variation addition pattern is determined from one or a plurality of types of sub-variation addition patterns based on which determination number the lottery random number belongs to. .

In the figure, [1] to [3] represent timings at which each element effect is executed. [1] means that the pseudo 1 change is being executed, [2] means that the pseudo 2 change is being executed, and [3] means that the pseudo 3 change is being executed. For example, "[1] 2 comrades participate → [1] Musou connection → [1] Aura use" means that the 2 comrades participation effect, the Musou connection effect, and the aura use effect are sequentially performed while the pseudo 1 variation is being executed. means In addition, ``[1] Participating with one friend → [1] Linking musou → [2] Using normal auras' will sequentially perform the effect of one friend participating and the linking of musou during the execution of the pseudo 1 variation, and the pseudo 2 variation. This means that the normal aura use effect will be performed during the execution of. In addition, "[2] 2 comrades participate → [2] Musou connection → [2] Aura use", during the execution of the pseudo 2 change, the 2 comrades participation effect, the Musou connection effect, and the aura use effect are performed in order. means That is, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of each element effect specified by the sub-fluctuation/fluctuation addition pattern means the number of times of the pseudo-variation at which the element effect is performed.

At this time, for example, three types of sub-variation addition patterns 8-1 to 8-3 are associated with the main variation addition pattern 8 shown in FIG. One sub-variation addition pattern is selected by lottery from among the three. In this main variation addition pattern 8, as shown in FIG. 18, the basic pattern of the special effect is the flow of effect of "Two companions participate → Musou connection → One friend participates → Ultimate connection" (each element effect order of execution) is specified. On the other hand, the three types of sub-variation addition patterns 8-1 to 8-3 associated with this main variation addition pattern 8 include, as detailed patterns for special effects, "[1] Two friends participate → [1] Musou Link → [1] Join 2 friends → [1] Ultimate link”, “[1] Join 2 friends → [1] Matchless link → [2] Join 2 friends → [2] Ultimate link”, “[2] ] Participation of two companions → [2] Musou connection → [2] Participation of two companions → [2] Ultimate connection", and so on, until the execution timing of each element effect is specified. In this way, in the sub-variation addition pattern, the execution timing of each element effect (in which pseudo-variation the element effect is performed) is specified based on the flow of each element effect specified in the main variation addition pattern. will be

In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the main variation addition pattern (variation addition information) is the same, the selection candidate of the sub variation addition pattern (execution timing of each element effect) according to the type of the selected sub variation pattern can be different. For example, when the sub-variation pattern PH1-3-1 is selected for the same main variation addition pattern 2, only one sub-variation addition pattern 2-1 is selected as the corresponding sub-variation addition pattern. On the other hand, when the sub-variation pattern PH1-4-1 is selected, three sub-variation addition patterns 2-1 to 2-3 become selection candidates as corresponding sub-variation addition patterns. At this time, since the sub-variation pattern PH1-3-1 is a variation effect pattern in which only the pseudo 1 variation is performed, only the sub-variation addition pattern 2-1 in which the execution timing of each element effect is the pseudo 1 variation is a selection candidate. becomes. On the other hand, the sub-variation pattern PH1-4-1 is a variation effect pattern that is performed from the pseudo 1 variation to the pseudo 2 variation, so the execution timing of each element effect is the pseudo 1 variation or the pseudo 2 variation Sub variation addition pattern 2 -1 to 2-3 are selected. In this way, depending on the number of pseudo runs specified by the sub-variation pattern, etc., the range of selection of the execution timing of each element effect is different. Selection candidates for the sub-variation addition pattern may also differ depending on the type of the pattern.

Next, the contents of the special effects (each elemental effects) will be described in order. As described above, this special effect includes, as elemental effects, an allied participation effect, an aura connection effect, and an aura use effect. Here, FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen for special effects (background screen in normal mode). When the effect mode currently being executed is the normal mode, the logo display area 730 on the screen displays a logo icon 731 imitating the logo indicating the model name of the gaming machine (indicated as "LOGO" in the illustrated example), An ally icon 732 imitating an ally character X who is the main character of this model, and fellow icons 733, 734, 735 imitating a plurality of fellow characters A, B, and C are displayed. In this embodiment, the display mode of the companion icons 733 to 735 changes according to the progress of the special effect (details will be described later). Also, FIG. 26 shows an effect pattern table for each element effect (fellow participation effect, aura connection effect, aura use effect). The detailed contents of this effect pattern table will be described later.

≪Friend participation performance≫
FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the companion participation effect and the aura connection effect. The companion entry effect is an effect in which an aura (aura image) is displayed around the corresponding companion icons 733 to 735 when a fellow character participates in the war as an ally character. In the following, “acquiring an aura” means that an aura is displayed around the companion icons 733-735. In this embodiment, "companion character A", "companion character B", and "companion character C" are set as a plurality of companion characters. You can acquire as many auras as you like (1, 2, 3). In other words, there is a 1:1 relationship between the number of fellow characters participating in the battle and the number of acquired auras. Therefore, the more fellow characters participate in the battle, the more auras can be acquired, and the degree of expectation for pseudo consecutive occurrence or continuation is improved.

As described above, the types of companion war effects include the one-friend war effect in which one fellow character participates in the war and obtains one aura, and the one in which two fellow characters participate in the war at the same time and obtain two auras. There is a production of two friends participating in the game. In addition, as a modified example, three fellow characters A, B, and C may participate in the war at the same time, and three fellow characters may obtain three auras at once.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the number of executions of the companion participation effect is set within the range of "0 times" to "2 times". When the number of executions of the friend-participation effect is set to a plurality of times, different teammate characters A to C participate in each part-partner-participation effect in each time. The order in which fellow characters A to C participate in the battle is always set in a fixed order (order of appearance). characters participate. Therefore, the fellow character B will not enter the battle before the fellow character A, and the fellow character C will not enter the war before the fellow character B. As a modification of the present embodiment, if fellow characters enter the war in an order contrary to the normal participation order, such as "fellow character B" → "fellow character A" (when the law is broken), , at that time, it may be a specification that the jackpot winning, pseudo-continuous occurrence or continuation is decided.

FIG. 26A is a schematic diagram showing a companion participation effect pattern table. A plurality of types of companion entry presentation patterns 1 to 5 are defined in the companion entry presentation pattern table. Fellow-participation effect patterns 1 to 5 are associated with the types of fellow characters appearing in the friend-participation effect and the number of auras acquired in the friend-participation effect (acquisition number). In this embodiment, a fellow participation effect pattern is selected according to the type of sub-variation addition pattern (detailed effect pattern of special effect). That is, in the present embodiment, since the order of participation of fellow characters is always constant, once the content of the sub-variation addition pattern (the number of participants, the number of times of participation, etc.) is determined, the types and auras of the corresponding fellow characters are acquired. number is uniquely determined. Fellow Participation Production Pattern 1 is a production pattern in which one fellow character A participates in the battle and acquires one aura. Fellow Participation Production Pattern 2 is a production pattern in which one fellow character B participates and acquires one aura. Fellow Participation Production Pattern 3 is a production pattern in which one fellow character C participates in the battle and acquires one aura. Fellow Participation Production Pattern 4 is a production pattern in which two fellow characters A and B enter the battle at the same time and acquire two auras. Fellow Participation Production Pattern 5 is a production pattern in which two fellow characters B and C enter the battle at the same time and acquire two auras.

Here, when one fellow character participates in the war, according to the order of warfare described above, fellow character B will not participate in the war before fellow character A Pattern 2 is never selected), fellow character C never enters the war before fellow character B (friend entry pattern 3 is never selected before fellow entry pattern 2). . Therefore, in the first fellow-participation effect, at least fellow-character A always participates regardless of the number of participants. In other words, in the first companion entry production, either the companion character A alone participates in the battle or the companion characters A and B participate in the battle simultaneously.

At this time, when a plurality of fellow-participation effects are performed during one variation display, in the second-partner-participation effect, among the plurality of fellow characters A, B, and C, in the first-part-partner-participation effect, Only the remaining fellow characters, excluding the fellow characters who participated in the war, can participate in the war. That is, when one fellow character participates in the first fellow-participation effect (when only fellow-character A participates), fellow-characters B and C can participate in the second fellow-participation effect. Then, when one fellow character participates in the second fellow-participation production, the fellow character B (the fellow character whose entry order is first) enters the war, and in the second fellow-participation production, two fellow characters are displayed at the same time. In the case of human participation, fellow characters B and C (remaining fellow characters) will participate. On the other hand, when two fellow characters participate in the war at the same time in the first fellow-participation effect (when fellow characters A and B participate in the war), only one fellow character (fellow-character C) remains in the second fellow-participation effect. will participate.

≪Aura connection production≫
The aura connection effect is a effect in which, when a player possesses a plurality of auras as a result of performing the companion participation effect, the plurality of auras are displayed in a connected manner. That is, the execution condition of the aura connection effect is that the number of possessed auras is plural (two or three). Therefore, when the number of possessed auras is 1, the condition for executing the aura connection effect is not satisfied, and the aura connection effect is not performed. The “number of possessed auras” means the number of auras currently displayed around the companion icon. Therefore, even if the number of auras obtained in the above-mentioned companion participation effect is more than one, if the aura is used in the aura use effect described later, the number of auras used will be counted from the number of auras possessed. Excluded. In other words, "the number of possessed auras" = "the number of acquired auras" - "the number of used auras". In addition, even if the number of possessed auras is one, if the number of possessed auras becomes plural by acquiring another one or two auras without using this one aura , the aura connection effect is executed.

As described above, the types of aura connection effects include the unrivaled connection effect and the ultimate connection effect. The musou connection effect is an effect in which two auras are connected and displayed when the number of possessed auras reaches two. The ultimate connection effect is a effect of connecting and displaying the three auras when the number of possessed auras reaches three. However, even if multiple auras are displayed in a connected state, the number of possessed auras will remain the same. It does not mean that the number of holdings is 1). Therefore, when the auras are in a state of incomparable connection, the number of auras possessed is two, and when the auras are in the state of ultimate connection, the number of auras possessed is three. Here, when the musou connection effect is executed (when the aura becomes a musou connection state), the result that will always succeed (true pseudo As a result, the continuous fanning effect turns into a fanning success effect), and it is confirmed that the next pseudo-variation will be performed. On the other hand, when the ultimate connection effect is executed (when the aura is in the ultimate connection state), the pseudo-continue 3 times is confirmed without failing the pseudo-continuation effect, which will be described later. In addition, when the ultimate connection effect is executed (when the aura is in the ultimate connection state), it is certain that the game will develop into SP reach C with a high degree of expectation.

FIG. 26B is a schematic diagram showing an aura connection effect pattern table in this embodiment. A plurality of types of aura connection effect patterns are defined in the aura connection effect pattern table. Aura connection effect patterns 1 and 2 are associated with types of aura connection states (musou connection, ultimate connection) and types of fellow characters having auras to be connected. In the present embodiment, an aura link battle effect pattern is selected according to the type of sub-variation addition pattern (detailed effect pattern of special effect). That is, in the present embodiment, once the content of the sub-variation addition pattern (the number of participants, the type of aura connection effect, etc.) is determined, the corresponding aura connection effect pattern is uniquely determined. Aura connection effect pattern 1 is a effect pattern in which the auras of two teammate characters A and B are connected and displayed to create a state of unrivaled connection. Aura connection effect pattern 2 is a effect pattern in which the auras of three teammate characters A, B, and C are connected and displayed, resulting in an ultimate connection state. As a modified example of the present embodiment, an effect pattern may be prepared in which the auras of two ally characters A and C or B and C are in a state of being in a state of incomparable connection.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, an example of the friend participation effect and the aura connection effect will be described. It should be noted that reference numerals are omitted in FIG. 27 due to space limitations.

FIGS. 27A1 and 27A2 are examples of effects when the aura connection effect is not performed. In this production example, first, as indicated by (A1) in the drawing, fellow character A participates in the game. Subsequently, as indicated by (A2) in the figure, an aura is displayed on the fellow icon 733 corresponding to fellow character A, and one aura is obtained. At this time, since the number of auras possessed is one, the aura connection effect is not executed.

FIGS. 27B1 to 27B3 are examples of effects when a musou connection effect is performed. In this production example, first, as shown in FIG. B participates. Subsequently, as shown in (B2) in the figure, an aura is displayed on the companion icon 734 corresponding to the companion character B, and the number of possessed auras becomes two. Then, as shown in (B3) in the figure, when the number of possessed auras becomes two, an aura connection effect (musou connection state) is generated, and the auras of fellow icons 733 and 734 are displayed in a connected manner.

FIGS. 27(C1) to (C3) are examples of effects when the ultimate connection effect is performed. In this production example, first, as shown in (C1) in the drawing, a state in which auras are displayed on companion icons 733 and 734 corresponding to fellow characters A and B (friend characters A and B are already state), fellow character C participates in the war. Subsequently, as shown in (C2) in the figure, an aura is displayed on the friend icon 735 corresponding to the friend character C, and the number of possessed auras is three.
become individual. Next, as shown in (C3) in the figure, when the number of possessed auras reaches 3, an aura connection effect (ultimate connection state) occurs, and the auras of fellow icons 733, 734, 735 are displayed in a connected manner. In addition, in a state where an aura is displayed on the fellow icon 733 corresponding to fellow character A (a state in which fellow character A has already participated in the war), fellow characters B and C participate in the war, Auras may be displayed on the companion icons 734 and 735, and an aura connection effect (ultimate connection state) may occur when the number of possessed auras reaches three.

≪Aura use production≫
Next, the aura use effect will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the aura use effect. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not a pseudo-repeat will occur or continue, and as a result, the pseudo-repeat will occur or continue (succeeding in the pseudo-repeat), or the pseudo-repeat will not occur or continue ( (failure in the pseudo-reaction), before the pseudo-reaction-effect (referred to as "true pseudo-reaction-effect") that deterministically informs or suggests It is possible to run A true pseudo continuous effect corresponds to a pseudo continuous effect (“pseudo 1 effect”, “pseudo 2 effect”) defined in the main variation patterns or sub-variation patterns of FIGS. 19 to 20 and the like. This aura use production is a pre-production of the true pseudo-continuous swaying production (pseudo 1 swaying, psuedo 2 swaying), regardless of the progress of the game. It is composed of a stimulus performance (referred to as a ``fake pseudo-continuous stimulus performance'') and a re-challenge performance in which the pseudo-continuous stimulus is redone after the false pseudo-continuous stimulus performance is performed. In this aura use effect, the real pseudo-continuous effect (later pseudo-continuous effect) is performed after passing through the fake pseudo-continuous effect (previous pseudo-continuous effect). It is a production to make it look as if the fanning production is being redone again. That is, in the present embodiment, in order to show the true pseudo continuous effect specified on the main variation pattern or the sub-variation pattern as a second pseudo continuous effect, before the execution of the true pseudo continuous effect, An aura use effect (fake pseudo-recital effect) is interrupted.

Here, FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a simulated continuation effect. (A1) to (A5) in the figure show an example of the effect when the pseudo-tendant is successful, and (B1) to (B5) in the figure show an example of the effect when the pseudo-tendant is unsuccessful. Pseudo consecutive fanning effect (true pseudo consecutive fanning effect, fake pseudo consecutive fanning effect) is, of the three rows of decorative patterns, after the left pattern and right pattern are temporarily displayed, the pseudo consecutive pattern is on top as the middle pattern. It moves slowly downward from the top, and based on whether or not this pseudo-run symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is an effect that arouses whether or not a pseudo-run will occur. The pseudo-continuous design is a special design (referred to as a "NEXT design") composed of the letters "NEXT" as an identification element of the decorative design. The types of this pseudo continuous fanning effect are roughly classified into a fanning success effect and a fanning failure effect. As shown in (A1) to (A5) in the figure, the successful fanning effect is that after the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, a pseudo consecutive symbol (NEXT symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle symbol. It is a production that suggests that a pseudo-variation will be performed. In the present embodiment, the successful swaying effect is not performed as a false pseudo swaying effect, and the successful swaying effect can be performed only in the true pseudo swaying effect. On the other hand, as shown in (B1) to (B5) in the drawing, in the fanning failure effect, after the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the pseudo-continuous symbol (NEXT symbol) is not temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle symbol. This is a production that suggests that pseudo-fluctuations are not performed. In the present embodiment, a failed stimulus effect is always performed in the false pseudo-continuous stimulus effect, and a failed stimulus effect may be performed even in the true pseudo-continuous stimulus effect. When the true pseudo consecutive fan effect is performed as a fan failure effect, after the NEXT pattern is not displayed temporarily (after the NEXT pattern slides from top to bottom), other decorations different from the left pattern or right pattern The pattern is stopped and displayed as a medium pattern, resulting in "missing". On the other hand, if the fake pseudo continuous fan effect is performed as a fan failure effect, after the NEXT symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed, only the middle symbol continues to be scrolled, leading to the re-challenge effect described below. become.

In the present embodiment, as the aura use effect, a retry effect is performed after a false pseudo continuous fan effect (failed fan effect) is performed. Then, after the re-challenge effect is performed, a true pseudo-continuous fanning effect (a successful fanning effect or a failed fanning effect) is performed. In this way, among the two pseudo-continuous fanning effects, the false pseudo-continuous fanning effect always results in failure, and the real pseudo-continuous fanning effect is either the fanning success effect or the fanning failure effect. depending on whether or not the next pseudo-variation is performed. It should be noted that, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 20 and the like, whether the true pseudo consecutive fanning effect is a fanning success effect or a fanning failure effect is determined in advance according to the selected main variation pattern (or sub-variation pattern). It's decided. In this embodiment, even if the pseudo-continuous effect is failed once, the pseudo-continuous effect is repeated twice, with a re-challenge effect interposed. It is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation and further enhance the pleasure of performing the pseudo-ream.

The re-challenge production is a production for redoing the pseudo-continuous agitation production using the aura acquired in the above companion participation production after the fake pseudo-continue agitation production (failed agitation production) is performed. This re-challenge effect can be executed when one or more auras obtained in the companion participation effect are possessed, and is not performed without going through the friend participation effect (without acquiring an aura). . That is, the execution condition for the re-challenge effect (aura use effect) is that one or more auras are actually possessed. Therefore, even if you acquire an aura in a companion participation effect, if you no longer have an aura due to using the aura (if the number of auras you have is 0), a re-challenge effect (aura use effect) is not performed. In addition, when the number of auras possessed reaches 3 (when the aura is in the ultimate connected state), the re-challenge effect (aura use effect) will not be performed (pseudo continuous fan effect will fail even once). ), the occurrence of three pseudo-runs is determined. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the re-challenge effect (aura use effect) is performed only when the number of possessed auras is one or two.

Specifically, in this re-challenge effect, a predetermined fellow character (referred to as a "re-challenge character") out of the three fellow characters uses (consumes) his own aura to perform a specific attack technique (usually It is a production that unleashes a technique or special move). Depending on the type of the re-challenge effect (type of attack technique), the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of the success of the pseudo-continue) that the subsequent pseudo-continuous stimulus effect will be a stimulus and a successful effect is suggested. The above-mentioned "re-challenge character" means an ally character who participated in the battle most recently (an ally character whose entry order is the latest) among the ally characters with auras. Therefore, when the re-challenge effect is performed when the number of possessed auras is one, the friendly character having that aura becomes the re-challenge character, and the re-challenge effect is performed when the number of auras possessed is two. In the case of being challenged, the ally character who is later in the order of participation among the two ally characters having each aura becomes the re-challenge character. Then, when the aura of the re-challenge character is used in the re-challenge performance, the aura possessed by this re-challenge character disappears, thereby subtracting one from the number of possessed auras. In this way, when the companion entry effect is performed, the number of auras increases according to the number of fellow characters participating in the war. will be subtracted.

Types of aura use effects (re-challenge effects) are roughly classified into normal aura use effects and special aura use effects. In the normal aura use effect, when the number of possessed auras is 1 (when the aura is in a non-connected state), the re-challenge character performs a normal attack technique (referred to as a "normal technique"). . The special aura use effect is a effect in which the re-challenge character releases a special attack technique (referred to as a "deathblow") when the number of possessed auras is two (when the auras are in a state of unrivaled connection). . At this time, when the normal aura use effect is performed, it is not determined whether the true pseudo-continuous fan effect is the fan success effect or the fan failure effect. On the other hand, when the special aura use effect is performed as the aura use effect, it is determined that the true pseudo-continuous fanning effect becomes the fanning success effect. At this time, the special aura use effect is a effect in which the aura of the ally character who comes later in the battle order is used when the aura is in a state where the auras are connected (a state in which the auras of the two fellow characters are connected). The fellow character A among the plurality of fellow characters never becomes a re-challenge character. In addition, when the aura is in a musou-connected state, if a special aura use effect is performed and 1 aura is used (when the number of possessed auras is reduced to 1), the musou-connected state will be cancelled. .

FIG. 26C is a schematic diagram showing an aura use effect pattern table. A plurality of kinds of aura use effect patterns are set in this aura use effect pattern table, and the type of retry character and the type of attack technique are associated with each aura use effect pattern. Aura use production pattern 1 is a production pattern in which fellow character A uses "normal technique 1" as an attack technique. Aura use effect pattern 2 is a effect pattern in which fellow character B uses "normal attack 2" as an attack technique. Aura use effect pattern 3 is a effect pattern in which fellow character C uses "normal attack 3" as an attack technique. Aura use production pattern 4 is a production pattern in which fellow character B uses a "deathblow" as an attack technique. In this embodiment, an aura use effect pattern is selected according to the type of sub-variation addition pattern (detailed effect pattern of special effect). In other words, in this embodiment, once the content of the sub-variation addition pattern (the number of participants, the type of aura connection effect, the order of the aura use effect, etc.) is determined, the corresponding aura use effect pattern is uniquely determined.

Next, an example of an aura use effect will be described. FIGS. 28A1 to 28A5 are schematic diagrams showing examples of effects when normal aura use effects are performed, and FIGS. 28B1 to 28B4 show examples of effects when special aura use effects are performed. It is a schematic diagram showing.

First, an example of a normal aura use effect will be described. It should be noted that (A1) in the figure is a false pseudo-continuous effect, and (A4) and (A5) in the figure are true pseudo-continuous effects.

First, as shown in (A1) in the figure, the previous pseudo-continuous fanning effect ends as a fanning failure effect, does not progress to the next pseudo-fluctuation, and only the middle pattern among the three rows of decorative patterns fluctuates (scrolls) display).

As shown in (A2) in the figure, the aura of the fellow icon 733 corresponding to the current re-challenge character (fellow character A) is strongly illuminated, and the re-challenge character (fellow character A) is materialized and displayed.

As indicated by (A3) in the figure, it is suggested that the re-challenging character (fellow character A) that has materialized fires a normal move, and that the pseudo-fighting will be redone. In addition, in the case of redoing the pseudo consecutive fanning effect by the normal technique, it is not determined whether the fanning success effect or the fanning failure effect will occur.

As shown in (A4) in the figure, it is suggested that the next pseudo change will be performed when the successful fanning effect is performed as a true pseudo continuous fanning effect. On the other hand, as indicated by (A5) in the figure, when a failed fanning effect is performed as a true pseudo continuous fanning effect, it is suggested that the next pseudo variation is not performed. Incidentally, as shown in (A4) and (A5) in the figure, the aura of the fellow icon corresponding to the re-challenge character (fellow character A) disappears substantially at the same time as the true simulated replay effect is performed.

Next, an example of a special aura use effect will be described. It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous fan effect of (B1) in the figure is a false pseudo-continuous fan effect, and the pseudo-continuous fan effect of (B4) in the figure is a true pseudo-continuous fan effect.

First, as shown in (B1) in the figure, the previous pseudo-continuous fanning effect ends as a fanning-failed performance, does not progress to the next pseudo-fluctuation, and only the middle pattern among the three rows of decorative patterns fluctuates (scrolls). display). At this time, the auras of the companion icons 733 and 734 corresponding to the companion characters A and B are in a state of being connected.

As shown in (B2) in the figure, the aura of the fellow icon 734 corresponding to the re-challenge character (fellow character B) among fellow characters A and B emits a strong light, and this re-challenge character (fellow character B) emits a strong aura. is materialized and displayed.

As shown in (B3) in the figure, it is suggested that the re-challenging character (fellow character B) that has materialized fires a special move, and that the simulated taunting will be redone. In addition, in the case of redoing the pseudo consecutive fanning by the deathblow, it is confirmed that the fanning success effect will be performed (it is decided that the next pseudo variation will be progressed).

As shown in (B4) in the figure, a subsequent pseudo-continuous-inflicting effect (in the illustrated example, successful inflection effect) is performed as a redoing of the pseudo-continuous-inflicting effect. It should be noted that the aura of the fellow icon corresponding to the re-challenge character (fellow character B) disappears substantially at the same time as the true pseudo-fighting effect is performed.

Next, other characteristic configurations that are applied in the special effects of this embodiment or its modification will be described. In this embodiment, the greater the number of pseudo-runs, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Since it is easy to develop into a reach, it is configured so that the expectation of a big hit is high. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram for explaining the other characteristic configuration 1 of the special effect, and FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram for explaining the other characteristic configuration 2 of the special effect. As described above, the flow of main variation addition patterns and special effects is not limited to the types shown in FIG. may be provided. Here, FIG. 30(A) shows the flow of a plurality of patterns of variable effects including the flow of variable effects corresponding to the main variable addition pattern 3 (effect of two companions joining the battle → effect of linking warriors → effect of using special aura). ), and FIG. 30(B) shows a plurality of patterns including the flow of variable effects corresponding to the main variable addition pattern 4 (effect of two companions joining the battle → effect of linking warriors → effect of using special aura → effect of using normal aura). It shows the flow of variable production (branch of production). In addition, FIG. 31(A) shows the flow of a plurality of patterns of variable performance (branching of performance) including the flow of the variable performance corresponding to the main variable addition pattern 3 or 4, and FIG. 31(B) shows the main variable addition. 31(C) shows the flow of variable effects (branching of effects) of multiple patterns including the flow of variable effects corresponding to pattern 6, and FIG. 31C includes the flow of variable effects corresponding to main variable addition pattern 5 or 7 It shows the flow of multiple patterns of variable production (branching of production).

(Other characteristic configuration 1)
As another characteristic configuration 1, in a situation where a Musou connection state has occurred (holding two auras), depending on whether or not this pseudo-continuation effect succeeds without using an aura, It is configured so that the degree of expectation for succeeding in the next pseudo-continuous fanning effect is different. For example, as shown in FIG. 30(A), in a situation where the pseudo 1 variation has started and the musou link state has occurred, if the pseudo continuation effect (pseudo 1 fan) is successful without using an aura, the pseudo Since the musou connection state is maintained at the start of the 2 variation, regardless of whether or not to go through the re-challenge effect (whether to redo the pseudo-continuous effect), the next pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo 2 It is confirmed that it will be successful even in incitement. In other words, if a Musou connected state occurs at the start of the pseudo-2 fluctuation, (a) a route that succeeds in the pseudo-2-push effect in one shot without redoing the pseudo-repeat effect, (b) once in the pseudo-repeat effect After failing, by redoing with a re-challenge effect, the route will progress to one of the routes of succeeding in the pseudo-consecutive effect (it will be determined that it will develop into the pseudo 3 variations). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30(B), in a situation where the pseudo 1 variation has started and the Musou connection state has occurred, the result of using the aura in the pseudo continuation effect (pseudo 1 sway) is a success (pseudo continuation After failing once in the agitation effect, if you succeed in a simulated re-challenge effect by trying again with a re-challenge effect), the musou connection state will be canceled at that point (the musou connection state will be canceled at the start of the pseudo 2 change). Therefore, it is uncertain whether or not the next pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo 2-stage effect) will be successful. In other words, if the musou link state is canceled at the start of the pseudo 2 variation (when the number of possessed auras is 1), (a) the pseudo 2 sway effect is successful in one shot without redoing the pseudo slash effect. route, (a) After failing once in a pseudo-continuous agitation production, a route that succeeds in a pseudo-continuous agitation production by trying again with a re-challenge production, (c) After failing in a pseudo-continuity agitation production once, a re-challenge production Even if you try again with , it will progress to one of the routes that fail in the pseudo-continuous effect (it becomes uncertain that it will develop into pseudo-3 fluctuations). Therefore, in a situation where Musou is connected (holding two auras), the aura is not used for the pseudo-strike effect compared to the case where the aura is used for the pseudo-strike effect. In the example shown in the figure, in the case of the former (B), three pseudo-runs are uncertain, and in the latter case (A), three pseudo-runs are likely to continue. It is deterministic), and the number of remaining auras is relatively large (in the example shown, 0 to 1 aura remains in the case of the former (B), and 1 to 2 in the case of the latter (A). It can be said that the expectation of a big hit is also high accordingly. That is, in the present embodiment, the expectation of a big hit is relatively higher in a pseudo-run than in a non-pseudo-run. Therefore, maintaining the musou connection state at a predetermined timing (in the above example, at the timing of the pseudo continuation effect in the pseudo 1 variation) means that the musou connection state is maintained at the predetermined timing. The degree of expectation for a big hit becomes relatively higher than when is released.

(Other characteristic configuration 2)
As another characteristic configuration 2, the number of fellow characters participating in the variable display is the same (two) in the case where the one-companion-participation effect is performed twice and the case where the two-partner-participation-participation effect is performed once. However, the case where two companion characters participate in the war is better than the case where two fellow characters participate in the war because the one companion participation effect is performed twice. , the degree of expectation for a big hit of the variable display is configured to be relatively high. This is preferably configured in a production pattern in which the friend participation effect is performed once during the pseudo 2 variation and the friend participation effect is not performed or performed only once during the pseudo 1 variation. For example, as shown in FIG. 31(A), when two companions participate in the war effect is performed once in the pseudo 2 variation, the number of possessed auras becomes 2 at that time, and the musou connection state occurs, so re-challenge. Regardless of whether or not to go through the performance (whether or not to redo the pseudo-continuous performance), it is determined that the next pseudo-continuous performance (pseudo 2-way performance) will be successful. That is, when the musou connection state occurs due to the fact that two companions participate in the war effect is performed once (when the number of possessed auras becomes 2), (b) After failing once in the pseudo-continuous agitation production, by performing a re-challenge production and trying again, the route will progress to a success in the pseudo-continuous agitation production (pseudo 3 variations ). On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 31(B) and 31(C), when the one-companion-participation effect is performed twice from the pseudo-1 variation to the pseudo-2 variation, the first one-friend-participation effect and the second Depending on whether or not there is a re-challenge effect (repeating the simulated continuation effect) between the one-participant participation effect for the first time, the presence or absence of the musou connection state will differ, and the subsequent results will differ. . For example, as shown in FIG. 31(B), after the first one-companion-participation effect is performed in the pseudo-1 variation, if the pseudo-1 incitement succeeds in one shot without redoing the pseudo-incitement effect, the pseudo-2 In the variation, when the second one-partner war effect is performed, the number of possessed auras will be 2, and a musou connection state will occur, so whether or not to go through the re-challenge effect after that Regardless of whether or not to redo the game, it is determined that the next simulated continuous effect (simulated 2nd effect) will be successful. In other words, when a musou connection state occurs due to the fact that one friend participates in the war effect twice (when the number of possessed auras is two), (b) After failing once in the pseudo-continuous agitation production, by performing a re-challenge production and trying again, the route will progress to a success in the pseudo-continuous agitation production (pseudo 3 variations ). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31(C), after the first one-partner war effect is performed in the pseudo-1 variation, the result of using the aura in the pseudo-continuous agitation effect (pseudo-1 agitation) is a success (pseudo-continuous After failing once in the agitation production, if the pseudo consecutive agitation production is successful by redoing with a re-challenge production), the number of possessed auras becomes 0 at that point. Then, even if the second one-man participation effect is performed in the pseudo 2 variation, the number of possessed auras is only 1 at that point, and the musou connection state does not occur, so the next pseudo continuation effect (pseudo 2) will be undetermined whether or not it will succeed. In other words, if the musou connection state does not occur even if one friend participates in the war effect twice (when the number of possessed auras is 1), (a) the pseudo 2-striking effect is performed without redoing the pseudo-striking effect. A route that succeeds in one shot, (a) A route that succeeds in a pseudo-continuous agitation effect by retrying after failing the pseudo-continuous agitation effect once, (c) After failing the pseudo-continuous agitation effect once , or the route of failing in the pseudo-consecutive incitement effect even if a redo by the re-challenge effect is performed (it is uncertain that it will develop into a pseudo-three-variation). In this way, when the one-companion-participation effect is performed twice between the pseudo-1 variation and the pseudo-2 variation, depending on whether or not a re-challenge effect (redo of the pseudo-consecutive agitation effect) is interposed between them, The result of the next pseudo-continuous fanning effect (pseudo-2 fanning) will change. Therefore, the case where two fellow characters participate in the war by performing the two-friend-participation-in-a-fighting effect once is more simulated than the case where two fellow characters participate in the war by performing the one-friend-participating-in-a-fighting effect twice. There is a high possibility that the run will continue (in the example shown, in the case of the former (B), the pseudo-run of 3 times is uncertain, and in the case of the latter (A), the pseudo-run of 3 times is definite), and the remaining aura The number of is also relatively large (in the example shown, 0 to 2 auras remain in the case of the former (B), and 1 to 2 auras remain in the case of the latter (A)). It can be said that the expectation of the big hit is also high. In the lottery process of the main variation addition pattern in the present embodiment, the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, and 5 that do not cause the unmatched connection state are selected as the main variation addition patterns corresponding to the main variation pattern for the big win. , 7, the main variation addition patterns 3, 4, 6, and 8 that generate the musou connection state are more likely to be selected. The main variation additional patterns 1, 2, 5, and 7 that do not cause the Musou connected state may be more likely to be selected than the main variation additional patterns 3, 4, 6, and 8 that cause . According to such a configuration, the two-friend-participation-in-a-participation effect is performed once rather than the case where the one-partner-participation-in-a-participation effect is performed twice so that two fellow-characters participate in the war (the occurrence of the musou-connected state is not confirmed). It can be said that the degree of expectation for a big hit is relatively higher when two fellow characters participate in the battle (when the occurrence of a musou-connected state is confirmed). It should be noted that the type of SP reach suggested when the one-friend participation effect is performed twice and the SP reach type suggested when the two-friend participation effect is performed once are the same (SP reach B above). In other words, even when the one-companion-participation effect is performed twice and when the two-companion-participation effect is performed once, the SP reach A does not develop (the SP reach that denies the development is the same. ), which is suggested to develop into SP reach B or SP reach C. However, the case where two companions participate in the war effect is performed once rather than the case where the one friend war effect is performed twice is more likely to develop into SP reach (SP reach C) with a higher degree of expectation. .

As a modification of this embodiment, a special character (referred to as a "specific character") other than fellow characters A to C is prepared, and in addition to fellow characters A to C, the specific character is also included in the companion war effect. It may be configured to participate. If a specific character participates in the game, it may be determined that the SP reach E will develop into a hot SP reach E with a higher expectation of a big hit than the SP reach A to C. In addition, when a specific character participates in the battle, the aura corresponding to this specific character may not be displayed, and the aura usage effect may not be executed (the pseudo-reaction may not fail). .

[Hold change effect]
The hold change effect changes the display mode of the hold image or the changing image corresponding to the operation hold ball (trigger hold) that is the target of the prefetch lottery, so that when the trigger hold is digested, the big hit is displayed. It is a production that suggests or notifies the possibility of becoming. In this embodiment, the pending change effect includes a pending image change effect that changes the pending image displayed in the pending image display area 710, and a changing image change effect that changes the changing image displayed in the changing image display area 720. have In the following, the two are simply referred to as pending change effects without distinguishing between them. However, the pending change effect that changes the pending image may be called the pending image change effect as described above, or the changing image is changed. The pending change effect may be referred to as the image change effect during fluctuation as described above.

FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram for explaining the pending image display area 710 and the changing image display area 720 in this embodiment. As described above, the lower area in the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided with the pending image display area 710 for displaying the pending image corresponding to the operation pending ball of the special symbol. In the pending image display area 710, a pending image corresponding to the active pending ball of the special symbol which is the subject of the game in the currently running game state among the active pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. Is displayed. That is, when the game state currently being executed is the normal game state or the latent guaranteed game state, since the variation display of the first special symbol is the main part of the game, the holding image corresponding to the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is displayed. On the other hand, if the game state currently being executed is the time-saving game state or the probability variable game state, the second special symbol variation display is the main part of the game, so the second special symbol operation reserve ball The reserved image corresponding to Is displayed. Each holding image is displayed in order according to the order of occurrence of the operation holding ball of the special symbol (ball entry order).

The holding image display area 710 is provided with four individual holding image display areas 711 to 714 corresponding to the upper limit of the operation holding ball of each special symbol. The individual reserved image display area 711 corresponds to the reserved image of reservation 1 (first reservation), the individual reserved image display area 712 corresponds to the reservation image of reservation 2 (second reservation), and the individual reserved image display area 713 corresponds to the pending image of pending 3 (third pending), and the individual pending image display area 714 corresponds to the pending image of pending 4 (fourth pending). Each of the individual reserved image display areas 711 to 714 is configured as a display area of the same size, and each can display one reserved image.

On the left side of the pending image display area 710, a variable image display area 720 is provided for displaying a variable image corresponding to the active pending ball of the special symbol digested in the variable display. In the changing image display area 720, among the changing displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the changing image corresponding to the changing display of the special symbol which is the subject of the game in the current game state is displayed. Is displayed. That is, when the game state currently being executed is the normal game state or the hidden game state, since the variation display of the first special symbol is the main part of the game, the image during variation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed. On the other hand, if the game state currently being executed is the time-saving game state or the variable probability game state, the variation display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game, so the image during variation corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol Is displayed. The changing image display area 720 is configured as a display area having a larger size than the individual reserved image display areas 711-714.

In the reserved image display area 710, each time a special symbol operation reserved ball is generated, one reserved image (holding 1, holding 2, holding 3, holding 4 holding images ) is additionally displayed. In addition, each time the operation pending ball of the special symbol is digested, the changing image displayed in the changing image display area 720 disappears, and the pending image displayed in the individual pending image display areas 711 to 714 (suspended 1, hold 2, hold 3, hold 4) move one by one to the image display area on the left side. Here, the pending images displayed in the individual pending image display areas 711 to 714 are digested in order from the left, and the earliest pending image displayed in the individual pending image display area 711 (the pending image of pending 1) is digested. Then, the pending image is moved to the changing image display area 720 and displayed as the changing image corresponding to the changing display, and is continuously displayed until the changing display ends. However, in situations where a specific effect is occurring, such as after the development of the SP reach effect, the pending image and the changing image may be hidden.In that case, when the specific effect ends ( The background effect before developing into the SP reach effect (for example, if you are staying in the normal mode, the background effect corresponding to the normal mode is restored), the pending image and the changing image are redisplayed, and the relevant Triggered by the termination of the variable display, the display of the image during variation is terminated. Further, as a modified example, even in a situation where a specific effect is occurring, such as after the development of the SP ready-to-play effect, the pending image and the changing image may be continuously displayed. may be used as a trigger to end the display of the changing image, while the pending image may be continuously displayed (shifted to the left) even after the changing display ends. In addition, as another modification, if a specific effect is occurring, such as after the development of the SP reach effect, the pending image may be hidden, while the changing image may be continuously displayed. In that case, triggered by the end of the specific effect (background effect before developing into SP reach effect, for example, if you are staying in normal mode, return to the background effect corresponding to normal mode), The pending image is redisplayed, and the display of the changing image is terminated when the variable display is terminated, while the pending image is continuously displayed (shifted to the left) even after the variable display is terminated. You may Here, in the present embodiment and each of the modifications described above, the display time of the image during fluctuation may be changed according to the degree of expectation for the big hit of the fluctuation display. By configuring in this way, it is also possible to guess the degree of expectation for a big hit by paying attention to the image during fluctuation, in addition to the presence or absence of the pseudo-continuous effect, the number of pseudo-continues, the presence or absence of the SP reach effect, and the type of the SP reach effect. can. Here, by paying attention to the display time of the changing image rather than simply the type of the changing image, in addition to the display mode of the notice effect, there is a sense of expectation for the length of the display time of the notice effect, which is different from the conventional one. be able to. In addition, regarding the display specifications (including those described as modifications) of the pending image and the changing image described above, in order to unify the appearance of the gameplay and production, other game states (other than the low probability low base state) may also be applicable, and conversely, in order to diversify the appearance of game playability and effects, it may be applicable only in the low-probability low-base state and not applied in other game states.

In this embodiment, different types of pending images and changing images are prepared for each effect mode, and the type of pending image and changing image corresponding to the effect mode currently being executed is displayed. That is, the pending image and the changing image are images dedicated to each production mode, which are different from each other among the normal mode (special mode), the suppression chance mode, the phantom battle rush mode, and the revenge mode. Hereinafter, the suspended image in the normal mode will be referred to as the "suspended image HA", and the changing image will be referred to as the "varying image HB". Hb”.

In the present embodiment, an image during variation is created as a reference image (original image), and a reduced image obtained by scaling the image during variation is generated as a retained image. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when performing drawing processing or the like for displaying the pending image, the changing image is read from the image data memory as reference image data (original image data), and this reference image data is reduced. Image data is used as a hold image. Specifically, the number of pixels (the number of pixels) that form the changing image is reduced by a predetermined reduction ratio (also referred to as “image reduction ratio”) in both the horizontal and vertical directions as viewed from the player. Configure as a held image. For example, if the number of pixels in the horizontal direction of the image being changed is "N" and the number of pixels in the vertical direction is "M", and the reduction ratio is set to "1/X (where X>1)", the retained image The number of pixels in the horizontal direction is "N/X", and the number of pixels in the vertical direction is "M/X". In this embodiment, the reduction ratio of the pending image with respect to the changing image is set to be different for each effect mode. Here, the definition that the reduction ratio “1/X” is large is that the reduction ratio is larger for “1/100” than for “1/10”, for example.

In the present embodiment, the reduction ratio "1/X2" of the holding image Ha with respect to the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode is better than the reduction ratio "1/X1" of the holding image HA with respect to the changing image HB in the normal mode. configured to grow. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the reduction ratio of the pending image HA to the changing image HB in the normal mode is "1/X1=1/1.18", and the pending image HA is the same as the changing image HB. Reduced to about 85% display size. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 39, the reduction ratio of the pending image Ha with respect to the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode is "1/X2=1/1.33", and the pending image Ha is approximately 75% smaller than the changing image Hb. It is reduced to % display size. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the image size difference between the holding image Ha and the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode is larger than the image size difference between the holding image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode. It's getting bigger. It should be noted that the image size difference refers to the difference in relative size of the pending image with respect to the image being changed.

In addition, as a modification, the reduction ratio "1/X1" of the holding image HA with respect to the changing image HB in the normal mode is set to be larger than the reduction ratio of the holding image Ha with respect to the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode. may be configured. That is, the image size difference between the pending image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode may be larger than the image size difference between the holding image Ha and the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode. .

<Normal Mode Suspended Image/Changing Image>
When the rendering mode currently being executed is the normal mode (including the special mode), the "normal display mode" and the "special display mode" are set as the display modes of the pending image HA and the changing image HB. FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram for explaining the holding image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode.

(Normal display mode)
The normal display mode is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a round icon imitating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is white.

(Special display mode)
The special display mode 1 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a circular icon imitating a circular shape, and the display color of the icon is blue. The special display mode 2 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a circular icon imitating a circular shape, and the display color of the icon is green. The special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a circular icon imitating a circular shape, and the display color of the icon is red. Special display mode 4 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a circular icon imitating a circular shape, and the display color of the icon is gold. Special display mode 5 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a circular icon imitating a circular shape, and the display color of the icon is rainbow.

In this embodiment, as the display modes of the pending image HA and the changing image HB, there are six types of normal display mode, special display mode 1, special display mode 2, special display mode 3, special display mode 4, and special display mode 5. is set. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the normal display mode is a "white icon", the special display mode 1 is a "blue icon", the special display mode 2 is a "green icon", the special display mode 3 is a "red icon", and the special display. Mode 4 is also referred to as "golden icon", and special display mode 5 is also referred to as "rainbow icon". On the drawing, six kinds of display modes of "white", "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are displayed in the holding image HA or the changing image HB. It is expressed by adding the name of That is, on the drawing, the letters "white" are added to represent the pending image HA and the changing image HB of the white icon, and the letters "blue" are added to represent the pending image HA and the changing image HB of the blue icon. , "green" characters are attached to express the pending image HA and the changing image HB of the green icon, and "red" characters are attached to express the pending image HA and the changing image HB of the red icon. The characters "gold" are added to represent the pending image HA and the changing image HB of the gold icon, and the characters "rainbow" are added to represent the pending image HA and the changing image HB of the rainbow icon. .

Here, the display mode of the pending image and the changing image is related to the reliability (jackpot expectation) that the result of the judgment result of the special symbol will be a big hit, and "white" < "blue" < "green" < The degree of expectation for a big hit is set to increase by one level in the order of "red"<"gold"<"rainbow". In other words, the holding image or the changing image of the display mode with high expectation of big win is more likely to be selected in the case of ``jackpot'' than in the case of ``loss'' as a result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is right. In addition, "rainbow color" means a premium display mode in which the winning of the jackpot is decided. Therefore, when a 'rainbow-colored' reserved image appears or changes to a 'rainbow-colored' reserved image, it is guaranteed that a big win is won in the variable display corresponding to the reserved image. In addition, when a “rainbow color” changing image appears or changes to a “rainbow color” changing image, it is guaranteed that the player will win a jackpot with the change display. It should be noted that the display mode of the pending image and the changing image may be represented by, for example, shape, size, pattern, motion, etc., instead of display color.

As described above, the pending change effect is a effect that suggests the expectation of a big hit in the variable display by changing the display mode of the normal mode exclusive pending image HA or the changing image HB. In this embodiment, in each of the variable displays from the variable display when a trigger suspension, which is a mode of prefetching lottery, occurs to the variable display when the trigger suspension is completed, the corresponding suspended image HA or the variable The display mode of the image HB may change. Whether or not the pending change performance can be executed is determined by a pending change prefetch lottery using a performance lottery random number.

FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram showing a hold change look-ahead lottery table in normal mode. The normal mode hold change look-ahead lottery is executed at a predetermined lottery timing. Predetermined lottery timing is when a new special symbol operation pending ball is generated (at the time of start winning). In the holding change look-ahead lottery, whether or not to execute the holding change performance is determined by lottery, and when it is decided to execute the holding change performance, the holding change pattern is determined. The operation pending ball that is the target of the pending change look-ahead lottery is the operation pending ball of the first special symbol generated by the new start winning prize. That is, since the variation display of the first special symbol is the main part of the game during execution of the normal mode, the operation suspension ball of the first special symbol becomes the object of the suspension change look-ahead lottery. Here, the execution condition of the hold change look-ahead lottery is that the preliminary determination result of the operation hold ball (trigger hold) of the first special symbol targeted for the look-ahead lottery is "big hit", "N reach loss (N reach type loss) )” or “missed SP reach (missed SP reach type)”. Therefore, if the result of preliminary determination of trigger suspension corresponds to "non-reach loss (loss of non-reach type)", it is excluded from the target of the hold change look-ahead lottery.

As shown in FIG. 34, the hold change look-ahead lottery table defines whether or not the hold change look-ahead effect can be executed. In the figure, for the sake of convenience, "selection rate" is indicated, but in reality, according to the obtained lottery random number value, the determination number (lottery random number value range) is set, and whether or not the pending change look-ahead effect can be executed is determined based on which determination number the lottery random number belongs to. In the figure, it is possible to select either "execution" or "non-execution" for the trigger suspension pre-determination results (jackpot, SP reach loss, N reach loss) subject to the hold change look-ahead lottery. is assigned a selection rate (determined number), and it is set so that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the pending change look-ahead effect is "executed" than when it is "non-executed" . In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, it may be configured such that the greater the number of operation pending balls, the higher the winning probability of the pending change look-ahead lottery. Here, if it is determined in this pending change look-ahead lottery to execute the pending change effect, a pending change pattern (holding change Production pattern) is determined by lottery.

Next, the hold change pattern in normal mode will be described. 35 to 38 are schematic diagrams showing the hold change pattern table in normal mode. FIG. 35 is set if trigger pending occurs as pending 1, FIG. 36 is set if trigger pending occurs as pending 2, FIG. 37 is set if trigger pending occurs as pending 3, FIG. is set if a trigger hold occurs as hold4. In the figure, the numerical values used for the lottery are omitted for convenience, but in fact, it has a table corresponding to the acquired pre-determination information (advance/failure pre-determination information and fluctuation pattern pre-determination information), and for each table, A judgment number (range of lottery random numbers) for determining the pending change pattern for the lottery random number is set, and the holding change pattern is determined based on which judgment number the lottery random number belongs to. to be determined.

A plurality of pending change patterns (ID numbers) are set in the pending change pattern table. A pending change pattern is a scenario in which a change route of the display mode of the pending image HA and the changing image HB related to the trigger pending is defined. Based on this pending change pattern, the display mode of the pending image HA and the changing image HB changes each time from the variable display when the trigger suspension occurs to the variable display when the trigger suspension is completed (when suspension occurs). , Suspended 3 variation, Suspended 2 variation, Suspended 1 variation, Subject variation) are defined in chronological order. The pending change of the pending image HA and the changing image HB occurs at the start timing of each variable display (the period from the end of the previous variable display to the start of the current variable display). Specifically, it is the timing immediately after each reserved image shifts to the image display area one level lower as the earliest actuation reserved ball is digested (however, it may be the timing just before the shift). . On the other hand, the display mode of the changing image changes at a predetermined timing during the changing display. This predetermined timing is any of the timing of the start of the pseudo 1 fluctuation (the fluctuation), the timing of the start of the pseudo 2 fluctuation, the timing of the start of the pseudo 3 fluctuation, the timing of the reach formation, and the timing of the SP reach development is the timing.

Here, in the figure, "at the time of occurrence of suspension" means the time of occurrence of trigger suspension (at the time of start winning) which is the target of the prefetching lottery. Therefore, the display mode (initial display mode) of the suspension image HA to be displayed in the variable display when the trigger suspension occurs is set in the "when suspension occurs" column. In the figure, "Hold 3 change" is the change display when the trigger hold is hold 3 (third hold), and "Hold 2 change" is the change display when the trigger hold is hold 2 (second hold). , "hold 1 change" means a change display when the trigger hold is hold 1 (first hold), and "target change" means a change display (the change display) when the trigger hold is completed. Therefore, in the column of "suspension 3 variation", the display mode of the suspension image HA displayed in the variation display when the trigger suspension is suspension 3, and in the column of "suspension 2 variation", when the trigger suspension is suspension 2 The display mode of the hold image HA displayed in the change display of , and the column of "hold 1 change" shows the display mode of the hold image HA displayed in the change display when the trigger hold is hold 1, and the display mode of the hold image HA displayed in the change display when the trigger hold is hold 1. In the column, the display mode of the changing image HB to be displayed in the changing display when the trigger suspension is terminated is set. In the present embodiment, changing the display mode of the pending image HA and the changing image HB means that the display mode is promoted (ranked up), and that the display mode is demoted (ranked down). Not included. The “promotion” includes the case where the display mode of the pending image HA or the changing image HB is promoted by one step per change (for example, the case where the display mode changes from “blue” to “green” by one step), There is a case where the display mode of the changing image HB is upgraded by two stages per change (for example, a case where it changes from "blue" to "red" by two stages).

Although the pending change pattern table is omitted in FIGS. 35 to 38, the selection rate of the pending change pattern differs between when the result of the preliminary determination is information indicating a big hit and when it is information indicating a loss. is set to First, the pending change pattern is, in principle, assigned a selection rate (determined number) according to the final display mode of the changing image (suspended image), and the result of prior determination is information indicating a big hit. (or if the information indicates a long-term fluctuation pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit), the final display mode is the selection rate in the order of “blue” < “green” < “red” < “gold” is set to be higher, the more the result of the pre-judgment is the information indicating the deviation (or the information indicates a short-time fluctuation pattern with a relatively low jackpot expectation), The final display mode is set so that the selectivity increases in the order of "gold"<"red"<"green"<"blue". When the display mode of the pending image HA or the changing image HB is "rainbow", it is guaranteed that the player will win the jackpot in the variable display when the trigger pending is terminated. Therefore, the five types of display modes (final display modes) of the pending image HA and the changing image HB are closely related to the degree of expectation that the result of the judgment of whether the special symbol will be a big hit. The degree of expectation for a big hit increases step by step in the order of “green”<“red”<“gold”<“rainbow”.

In addition, even if the final display mode of the changing image HB (holding image HA) is the same display mode, the display mode is changed to the final display mode through one-step promotion (rank up). , the degree of expectation for a big hit is set to be higher in the case of changing to the final display mode through two stages of promotion (ranking up). That is, even if the final display mode of the changing image HB (holding image HA) is the same, the greater the promotion width (the number of stages of promotion) until the display mode changes, the higher the expectation of a big win. .

Further, when the promotion range until the change to the final display mode is the same, the degree of expectation for a big hit is set to be higher as the timing of the change is delayed. That is, the later the timing of changing from the normal display mode (default display) to the special display mode or the timing of changing from the lower special display mode to the higher special display mode, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, even if the display mode of the pending image HA or the changing image HB does not change at an early timing in a plurality of variable displays, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of promotions per promotion is set to two stages, but the number of promotions is not limited to this, and the number of promotions per promotion may be set to three or more stages. You may limit one promotion width to only one step. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the pending image HA or the changing image HB is changed only once during execution of one variable display. The display mode of HA or the changing image HB may be changed multiple times. In particular, in the variable display when the trigger suspension is terminated, it is preferable that the display mode of the variable image HB is changed a plurality of times. The number of times the display mode of HB changes is at most one, but the number of times the display mode of the changing image HB changes during one execution of the variable display is a plurality of times (for example, 1 to 3 changes). possible). Further, as the display mode of the changing image HB, a special display mode that is not set as the display mode of the holding image HA may be set. Further, as a modified example, assuming that there are a first timing, which is the first half of the variable display, and a second timing, which is the latter half of the variable display, as timings at which the display mode of the changing image HB can be changed, the second timing is It may be configured such that the change in the display mode of the image HB during fluctuation is more likely to change to the display mode with a high degree of expectation. As an example, in the variable display for 40 seconds in which SP reach C is performed, if the display mode of the changing image HB at the start of the change is blue, and if it changes at the first timing after 15 seconds from the start of the change, The possibility of changing to green is high, but the possibility of changing to red is low, but if it changes at the second timing 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the possibility of changing to green is low and the possibility of changing to red is low. You may make it high. In addition, the specifications of the display mode change described above (including those described as modifications) can be applied to other game states (other than the low probability low base state) in order to unify the gameplay and appearance of the production. Conversely, in order to diversify the appearance of game playability and effects, it may be applicable only in the low-probability low-base state, and may not be applied in other game states.

<Pending image/changing image of suppression chance mode>
When the production mode currently being executed is the suppression chance mode, the “normal display mode” and the “special display mode” are set as the display modes of the pending image Ha and the changing image Hb. FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram for explaining the holding image Ha and the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode.

(Normal display mode)
The normal display mode is a display mode in which the shape of the image becomes a character icon imitating a specific enemy character (so-called small fry character). Although illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, a special normal display mode (also referred to as a "specific display mode") is prepared as a display mode of the changing image Hb in addition to the normal display mode. there is This specific display mode (special normal display mode) is a display mode in which a plurality of character icons are displayed in a state in which a plurality of character icons are superimposed one on another in the changing image display area 720 (see FIG. 46 for details). Details of the specific display mode will be described later.

(Special display mode)
The special display mode 1 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a character A icon that imitates a specific character A (character of "subtle"). The special display mode 2 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a letter B icon imitating a specific letter B (characters of "opportunity"). The special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a character C icon that imitates a specific character C (characters of "hot heat").

In the present embodiment, as described above, the normal display mode (including the specific display mode), the special display mode 1, the special display mode 2, and the special display mode 3 are set as the display modes of the pending image Ha and the changing image Hb. ing. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the normal display mode is a "character icon", the special display mode 1 is a "character A icon", the special display mode 2 is a "character B icon", and the special display mode 3 is a "character C icon". Also called

Here, the display mode of the pending image Ha and the changing image Hb is related to the reliability (big hit expectation) that the result of the special symbol win/fail judgment is a big hit, and "character icon"<"character A icon" The degree of expectation for a big hit is set to increase by one level in the order of <“character B icon”<“character C icon”. In other words, the holding image or the changing image of the display mode with high expectation of big win is more likely to be selected in the case of ``jackpot'' than in the case of ``loss'' as a result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is right. The display mode of the pending image Ha and the changing image Hb may be expressed by, for example, display colors, patterns, motions, etc., instead of image shapes.

As described above, the holding change effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit in the variable display by changing the display mode of the holding image Ha dedicated to the suppression chance mode or the changing image Hb. In this embodiment, in each of the variable displays from the variable display when a trigger hold, which is a form of a prefetch lottery, occurs to the variable display when the trigger hold is digested, the corresponding hold image Ha or during the change The display mode of the image Hb may change. Whether or not the pending change performance can be executed is determined by a pending change prefetch lottery using a performance lottery random number.

FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram showing a pending change look-ahead lottery table for the suppression chance mode. The pending change look-ahead lottery in the suppression chance mode is executed at a predetermined lottery timing. Predetermined lottery timing is when a new special symbol operation pending ball is generated (at the time of start winning). In the holding change look-ahead lottery, whether or not to execute the holding change performance is determined by lottery, and when it is decided to execute the holding change performance, the holding change pattern is determined. The ball with pending operation that is the target of the pending change look-ahead lottery is the ball with pending operation generated by a new start winning prize. Therefore, even if one or more operation-reserved balls (preceding operation-reserved balls) already exist, the subject of the reservation change look-ahead lottery is the newly generated operation-reserved ball. In the present embodiment, in the game state (normal game state, hidden game state) in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main part of the game, the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is the object of the holding change prefetch lottery. In the game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) in which the variable display of the 2 special symbols is the main part of the game, the operation pending ball of the 2nd special symbol becomes the object of the pending change prefetching lottery. The execution condition of this hold change look-ahead lottery is that the pre-determination result of the actuation hold ball (trigger hold) targeted for the look-ahead lottery corresponds to either "big hit" or "lose". In addition, in the suppression chance mode, due to the adoption of battle specs, "N reach loss (N reach type loss)" or "SP reach loss (SP reach type loss)" is not set as the type of loss. Therefore, unlike the normal mode, if the result of the preliminary determination is "non-reach loss (non-reach type loss)", it will be subject to the pending change look-ahead lottery.

FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a hold change look-ahead lottery table in the suppression chance mode. The pending change prefetch lottery table defines whether or not the pending change prefetch effect can be executed. In the figure, for the sake of convenience, "selection rate" is indicated, but in reality, according to the obtained lottery random number value, the determination number (lottery random number value range) is set, and whether or not the pending change look-ahead effect can be executed is determined based on which determination number the lottery random number belongs to. In the figure, the selection rate ( Judgment number) is assigned, and the expectation of a big hit or the advantage of a big hit is higher when the pending change look-ahead effect is "executed" than when it is "non-executed" (presence of probability change, number of prize balls) is set to be higher. In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, it may be configured such that the greater the number of operation pending balls, the higher the winning probability of the pending change look-ahead lottery. Here, in this pending change prefetch lottery, if it is determined to execute the pending change effect, a pending change pattern ( Suspended change effect pattern) is determined by lottery.

Next, the hold change pattern in the suppression chance mode will be described. 41 to 44 are schematic diagrams showing holding change pattern tables in the suppression chance mode. FIG. 41 is set if trigger pending occurs as pending 1, FIG. 42 is set if trigger pending occurs as pending 2, FIG. 43 is set if trigger pending occurs as pending 3, FIG. is set if a trigger hold occurs as hold4. In the figure, the numerical values used for the lottery are omitted for convenience, but in fact, it has a table corresponding to the acquired pre-determination information (advance/failure pre-determination information and fluctuation pattern pre-determination information), and for each table, A judgment number (range of lottery random numbers) for determining the pending change pattern for the lottery random number is set, and the holding change pattern is determined based on which judgment number the lottery random number belongs to. to be determined.

A plurality of pending change patterns (ID numbers) are set in the pending change pattern table. The pending change pattern is a scenario in which a change route of the display mode of the pending image Ha and the changing image Hb related to the trigger pending is defined. Based on this pending change pattern, the display mode of the pending image Ha and the changing image Hb changes each time from the variable display when the trigger suspension occurs to the variable display when the trigger suspension is completed (when suspension occurs). , Suspended 3 variation, Suspended 2 variation, Suspended 1 variation, Subject variation) are defined in chronological order. The display mode of the pending image Ha changes at the start timing of each variable display (at least the period from the end of the previous variable display to the start of the current variable display). Specifically, it is the timing immediately after each pending image is shifted to the image display area one level lower due to the pending digestion (however, it may be the timing immediately before the shift). On the other hand, the display mode of the changing image Hb changes at the start timing of the changing display.

Here, in the figure, "at the time of occurrence of suspension" means the time of occurrence of trigger suspension (at the time of start winning) which is the target of the prefetching lottery. Therefore, the display mode (initial display mode) of the pending image to be displayed in the variable display when the trigger pending occurs is set in the "when pending occurs" column. In the figure, "Hold 3 change" is the change display when the trigger hold is hold 3 (third hold), and "Hold 2 change" is the change display when the trigger hold is hold 2 (second hold). , "hold 1 change" means a change display when the trigger hold is hold 1 (first hold), and "target change" means a change display (the change display) when the trigger hold is completed. Therefore, in the column of "suspension 3 variation", the display mode of the suspension image Ha displayed in the variation display when the trigger suspension is suspension 3, and in the column of "suspension 2 variation", when the trigger suspension is suspension 2 The display mode of the hold image Ha displayed in the change display of , and the display mode of the hold image Ha displayed in the change display when the trigger hold is hold 1, in the column of "hold 1 change", the display form of the hold image Ha displayed in the change display when the trigger hold is hold 1, In the column, the display mode of the changing image Hb to be displayed in the changing display when the trigger suspension is terminated is set. In the present embodiment, changing the display mode of the pending image Ha and the changing image Hb means that the display mode is promoted (ranked up) from the normal display mode to the special display mode. It does not include demotion (rank down) from the special display mode to the normal display mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial display mode of the pending image Ha at the time of pending occurrence (at the time of start winning) is always the normal display mode (character icon), but is not limited to this configuration, pending occurrence A configuration may be adopted in which the initial display mode of the pending image Ha at time (at the start winning) is a special display mode (character icon). In other words, the suspension image Ha may suddenly appear in a special display mode (character icon) when the suspension occurs (when the winning prize is started).

Although the pending change pattern table is omitted in FIGS. 41 to 44, the selection rate of the pending change pattern differs between when the result of the preliminary determination is information indicating a big hit and when it is information indicating a loss. is set to First, the pending change pattern is, in principle, assigned a selection rate (determined number) according to the final display mode of the changing image (suspended image), and the result of prior determination is information indicating a big hit. (or when the information indicates a long-term variation pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit), the final display mode is in the order of "character A icon" < "character B icon" < "character C icon" If the selection rate is set to be high, but the result of the pre-judgment is information indicating a failure (or if the information indicates a short-term fluctuation pattern with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big hit) The final display mode is set so that the selection rate increases in the order of "character C icon"<"character B icon"<"character A icon". Therefore, the four types of display modes (final display modes) of the pending image Ha and the changing image Hb are closely related to the degree of expectation that the result of the determination of whether the special symbol will be a big hit. '<"character B icon"<"character C icon". Note that the display mode of the pending image Ha and the changing image Hb in the control chance mode is not set to a display mode for determining the big win. However, as a modified example of the present embodiment, a special display mode (for example, a character icon imitating the characters "Accurate") may be set to confirm the big hit.

Further, when the final display mode of the changing image Hb (suspended image Ha) is the same, the later the timing of the change, the higher the expectation of a big hit. That is, the later the timing of changing from the normal display mode (default display) to the special display mode, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, even if the display mode of the pending image Ha and the changing image Hb does not change at an early timing in the variable display a plurality of times, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

In addition, in the suppression chance mode, unlike the above-described normal mode, the number of pending changes performed in one or more times of changing display is only one, and the display mode of the holding image Ha or the changing image Hb is normal display. Only cases where the mode changes to one of the special display modes 1 to 4 are set. Therefore, the display mode of the pending image Ha or the changing image Hb does not change from the lower special display mode to the higher special display mode. That is, when the display mode of the pending image Ha or the changing image Hb changes to any one of the special display modes 1 to 4 of the plurality of types of special display modes, the special display mode is the final display mode. Become. In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, the display mode of the pending image Ha may be configured to change multiple times in one or multiple times of variable display. In that case, unlike the above-described normal mode, even if it is configured to change multiple times, it is preferable to reduce the number of times of change than in the normal mode (the display mode of the pending image Ha is changed once or more than once). If the variable display changes multiple times, it is preferable that the maximum number of changes in the normal mode is greater than the maximum number of changes in the suppression chance mode).

Here, when a specific hold change pattern is selected from among the plurality of types of hold change patterns, a special hold change effect that does not appear in any other scene (production mode) is performed. A “specific pending change pattern” is a pending change pattern in which a pending change occurs in the change display (subject change). Specifically, the ID numbers are "1-1", "1-2", "1-3", "2-1", "2-3", "2-5", "3-1", The pending change patterns are '3-4', '3-7', '4-1', '4-5' and '4-9'. In the special suspension change effect, in the variation display from the occurrence of the trigger suspension to the digestion (variation display until reaching the variation display), every time the preceding operation suspension ball is digested, the image during variation Hb This is an effect in which the display mode of is changed to a special normal display mode (specific display mode) different from the ordinary normal display mode. The specific display mode is a display mode in which a plurality of character icons are displayed in an overlapping state, unlike an ordinary normal display mode (a display mode in which one character icon is displayed alone). Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the display mode in which two character icons are displayed in a superimposed state is referred to as "specific display mode 2", and the display mode in which three character icons are displayed in a superimposed state is referred to as "specific display mode 3". do.

Next, an example of the pending change effect in the suppression chance mode will be described. FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a pending change effect in the suppression chance mode. In this production example, the production mode is the suppression chance mode, and the suspension image Ha corresponding to the operation suspension ball of the second special symbol is displayed. Note that in the drawing, due to space limitations, the pending image display area 710 and the changing image display area 720 are mainly shown as part of the screen.

As shown in (A) in the figure, in a certain variation display (N-th variation display), on the screen, three holding images Ha1 to Ha3 corresponding to the operation holding ball of the second special symbol and the fluctuation In-varying image Hb0 corresponding to the display (varying display of the second special symbol) is displayed. In the figure, the first reserved image is "Ha1", the second reserved image is "Ha2", and the third reserved image is shown in accordance with the ball entry order of the second special symbol actuation reserved balls at this time. is represented by "Ha3", and the changing image is represented by "Hb0". In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the second pending image Ha2 is the pending image corresponding to the trigger pending at this time. In the drawing, all of the pending images Ha1 to Ha3 and the changing image Hb0 are displayed in the normal display mode (character icon).

As shown in (B) in the figure, when the N-th change display is completed, the earliest pending image Ha1 is digested, thereby shifting to the changing image display area 720 and switching to the changing image Hb1, and each The reserved images HA2 and HA3 are shifted to the left.

As shown in (C) in the figure, when the pending image Ha2 (character icon) corresponding to the trigger pending is struck from the outside, a pending change suggestive effect (blow effect) is generated to incite whether or not the pending change will occur. do.

As shown in (D) in the figure, as a result of the character icon being destroyed by an external blow, the display mode of this pending image Ha2 changes to a special display mode (a letter C icon imitating the letter "opportunity"). Then, the next variable display (N+1th variable display) is started. Incidentally, as the pending change suggesting effect, there may be a fake effect in which the pending change does not occur even if the character icon is hit. In addition, when a fake effect is provided, a plurality of production patterns of a hitting effect, which is a pending change suggestive effect that arouses whether or not a pending change will occur, may be provided. It is possible to change the display mode of the pending image Ha in the case of a large hitting pattern with a higher probability of changing the display mode of the pending image Ha. It may be configured such that the possibility of changing to the letter C icon is higher (the large-hit pattern has a higher possibility of changing to the letter C icon than the small-hit pattern).

Subsequently, an example of the special holding change effect in the suppression chance mode will be described. FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a special hold change effect in the suppression chance mode. In this production example, the production mode is the suppression chance mode, and the suspension image Ha corresponding to the operation suspension ball of the second special symbol is displayed. Note that in the drawing, due to space limitations, the pending image display area 710 and the changing image display area 720 are mainly shown as part of the screen.

As shown in (A) in the figure, during the execution of a certain variation display (the N-th variation display), a new second special symbol operation suspension ball is generated by the start winning, and this operation suspension ball (trigger suspension ), the pending image Ha3 corresponding to this actuation pending ball is displayed as the third pending image corresponding to the pending order. In the figure, according to the ball entry order of the second special symbol, the first reserved image is "Ha1", the second reserved image is "Ha2", and the third reserved image is shown. "Ha3" represents (holding image related to trigger holding), and "Hb0" represents a changing image to be displayed in a variable manner. At this point, all of the pending images Ha1 to Ha3 and the changing image Hb0 are displayed in the normal display mode (character icon).

As shown in (B) in the figure, when the N-th change display is completed, the earliest pending image Ha1 is digested, thereby shifting to the changing image display area 720 and switching to the changing image Hb1, and each The reserved images Ha2 and Ha3 are shifted to the left, and the next variable display (N+1th variable display) is started. Also, at the start of this variable display, a special effect effect occurs in which all the character icons are struck by lightning and charged with electricity (charged state). This special effect effect is a pending change suggesting effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending image (or the changing image) relating to trigger pending changes from the normal display mode to the special display mode. This special effect presentation is continuously performed until the pending image Ha3 related to the pending trigger moves to the changing image display area 720 (until the pending trigger is completed).

As shown in (C) in the figure, when the N+1-th variation display is completed, the first suspended image Ha2 is digested, thereby shifting to the varying image display area 720 and switching to the varying image Hb2, After the image Ha3 shifts to the left, the N+2th variation display is started. At this time, when the pending image Ha2 is switched to the changing image Hb2, the display mode of the changing image Hb2 changes to the specific display mode 2 (special normal display mode). A specific display mode 2 is a display mode in which two character icons are displayed in a superimposed state. However, visually, the character icon corresponding to the previous variable display remains without disappearing from the changing image display area 720, and the character icon corresponding to the previous variable display and the character icon corresponding to the current variable display are displayed. Icons appear to be displayed side by side in the changing image display area 720 .

As shown in (D) in the figure, when the N+2th variation display is completed, the earliest pending image Ha3 is digested, thereby shifting to the image display area 720 during variation and switching to image Hb3 during variation. At this time, when the pending image Ha3 is switched to the changing image Hb3, the display mode of the changing image Hb3 changes to the specific display mode 3 (special normal display mode). A specific display mode 3 is a display mode in which three character icons are displayed in a superimposed state. However, visually, the character icons corresponding to the two-previous and previous variable display do not disappear and remain, and the character icon corresponding to the two-previous variable display, the character icon corresponding to the previous variable display, and the current variation The character icon corresponding to the display appears to be displayed side by side in the changing image display area 720 .

As shown in (E) in the figure, immediately after the changing image Hb3 is displayed in the changing image display area 720, the plurality of character icons disappear and the display mode of the changing image Hb3 changes to the special display mode 3 (character C icon) is generated, and the (N+3)th variation display is started.

In this suppression chance mode, when trigger suspension (jackpot suspension) that becomes a big hit occurs, if the type of the jackpot is "2R normal jackpot", even if you win the hold change look-ahead lottery, the hold image It may be configured so that the display mode of Ha or the changing image Hb does not change to the display mode of the high expectation (character C icon) (however, even if the trigger hold is lost and held, the hold image is changed to the high expectation It is desirable to have a configuration that does not change to the degree display mode). The reason for this is that although the display mode of the pending image Ha or the changing image Hb has changed to a highly anticipated display mode (for example, a character C icon), the change display results in a defeat in the battle effect, and the result is "2R This is because if the game becomes a "normal jackpot", the player's desire to play will decrease, and the player's distrust of the pending change effect will become stronger. Conversely, in the control chance mode, when a hold that becomes a big hit occurs, only when the type of the big win is "16R specific big hit", by winning the hold change look-ahead lottery, the hold image Ha or the change It is preferable that the display mode of the middle image Hb can be changed to a high-expectation display mode (character C icon). Therefore, in this suppression chance mode, when the display mode of the changing image Hb changes to a high-expectation display mode (character C icon) at the start of the variable display (at least before reaching reach), SP reach (battle When it develops into a performance), it is determined that the player has won the "16 specific jackpot". Here, in the normal mode as well as in the suppression chance mode, in the case of "4R probability variable jackpot", the display mode of the pending image HA or the changing image HB is a high-expectation display mode (golden icon, rainbow icon) On the other hand, in the case of the "4R normal jackpot", the display mode of the pending image HA or the changing image HB may be configured not to change to the high-expectation display mode (golden icon, rainbow icon).

<Modified example 1 of pending change effect: pillar of fire icon>
Next, Modification 1 of the hold change effect of the present embodiment will be described. Modification 1 basically has the same configuration as the above-described present embodiment. I will explain the part.

In this modified example, a special display mode is set as the display mode of the pending image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode, in addition to the above-described normal display mode and special display mode. FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of a pending image and a changing image in the first modified example.

The normal display mode and the special display mode in this modified example are the same as the normal display mode and the special display mode in the present embodiment described above. That is, the normal display mode is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a circular icon imitating a circular shape, and the display color of the icon is white. The special display mode 1 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a circular icon imitating a circular shape, and the display color of the icon is blue. The special display mode 2 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a circular icon imitating a circular shape, and the display color of the icon is green. The special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a circular icon imitating a circular shape, and the display color of the icon is red. Special display mode 4 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a circular icon imitating a circular shape, and the display color of the icon is gold. Special display mode 5 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a circular icon imitating a circular shape, and the display color of the icon is rainbow.

The special display mode 1 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a weak pillar of fire icon imitating a small pillar of fire. The special display mode 2 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a medium icon of a pillar of fire imitating a medium-sized pillar of fire. The special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a strong pillar of fire icon imitating a large pillar of fire. In this modified example, the "weak pillar of fire icon", the "medium pillar of fire icon", and the "strong pillar of fire icon" are collectively referred to simply as the "pillar of fire icon".

In this modification, there are a case where a special display mode appears as an initial display mode (a display mode when suspension occurs) of the pending image HA, and a case where a special display mode appears as a display mode after the pending change of the pending image HA. be. When the holding image HA is displayed in the special display mode, the display mode becomes as if the pillar of fire icon is hiding the round icon, and the display mode of the pillar of fire icon is maintained until the start of the variable display or the reach establishment. is continuously displayed as a special display mode. Unlike the normal display mode and the special display mode, this special display mode is not displayed until the end of the variable display (it does not become the final display mode), and is not displayed at the start of the variable display or when the reach is established. It can be said that it is an intermediate display mode that changes to another display mode (special display mode) at times. As a modification thereof, a pending image (pillar of fire image) is prepared separately from the pending image HA, and the pillar of fire image is displayed superimposed on the front side of the pending image HA, resulting in two pending images (pillar of fire image, pending image HA) may be displayed as a composite pending image. In that case, the pillar of fire image (pillar of fire icon) does not have to hide the reserved image HA (round icon) to such an extent that it is completely invisible. Only the part may be hidden to the extent that it can be visually recognized (it is preferable that at least the display color of the round icon is hidden to the extent that it cannot be identified).

In this modification, at the start of the variable display or when the ready-to-win state is established, when the display mode of the changing image HB changes from the special display mode to another display mode (when the pillar of fire icon disappears), the changing image A pending change inciting effect is executed to incite whether or not the display mode of HB will change to the special display mode. Specifically, after the flame of the fire pillar icon becomes stronger for a moment and disappears, does the pending change inciting effect change to a white icon (normal display mode) or a blue or higher icon (special display mode)? It is a performance that inspires. The types of pending change swaying effects include a failure effect that changes from the fire pillar icon (special display mode) to a white icon (normal display mode), and a fire pillar icon (special display mode) that changes to a blue or higher icon (special display mode). There is a changing success story. In this modification, as a plurality of types of special display modes, "special display mode 1 (weak pillar of fire icon)" <"special display mode 2 (medium pillar of fire icon)" <"special display mode 3 (strong pillar of fire icon)" The possibility of changing the display mode of the changing image HB to the highly anticipated special display mode increases one step at a time.

Next, the relationship between the decorative pattern on the screen and the pending image HA (fluctuation image HB) will be described. FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram conceptually showing the layer structure of the effect display device 70 in this modified example. (A) in the figure shows the layer structure during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and (B) in the figure shows the layer structure during the stationary display of the decorative pattern. "Layer" means each layer of a hierarchical structure that defines the display priority of each image that constitutes the entire image. In this modification, the background image layer R101, the decorative pattern layers R102 to R104, the pending image HA (including the changing image HB) layer R105, etc. are displayed on the screen in a superimposed state. Layers with higher display priority are placed on higher layers (front side from the player's perspective), and layers with lower display priority are placed on lower layers (back side from the player's view). be done. The decorative pattern layers R102 to R104 include a left pattern layer R102, a right pattern layer R103, and a middle pattern layer R104. In addition, in this modification, the layer of the pending image HA and the layer of the changing image HB are configured by the common layer R105, but the layer of the pending image HA and the layer of the changing image HB are formed in separate layers. Alternatively, the layers of the four reserved images HA may be composed of separate layers.

Here, the special display mode (pillar of fire icon) is formed in a relatively large display size compared to the other display modes (round icon), and is displayed before and after the decorative pattern during variable display or stop display. It can be superimposed and displayed. In other words, while the decorative symbols are being variably displayed or stopped, there are cases where the pillar of fire icon and the decorative symbols overlap each other on the screen. It should be noted that the term "during display of the decorative pattern being stopped" as used herein includes the concept of "during fixed stop display" of the decorative pattern, but does not include "during temporary stop display" (i.e., during temporary stop display during pseudo continuous effect is a concept included in “during variable display”). In this embodiment, the display priority between the decorative pattern layers R102 to R104 and the reserved image HA layer R105 is switched depending on whether the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner or is being displayed stationary. Specifically, when a variation start command is received from the main control board 100, the pending image HA and the varying image HB are preferentially displayed over the decorative symbols during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The layer R105 of the reserved image HA is assigned higher than the decorative pattern layers R102 to R104. The reason for this is that the "decorative symbol variable display" is not the "decorative symbol fixed stop display", which is a situation in which the player is clearly notified of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols to notify the player of the definite win/loss judgment result. In the situation of "during and temporary stop display", even if the identification display (number) of the decorative pattern cannot be clearly seen, the player is notified that the display is changing or that the temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation, etc.) is in progress. On the other hand, it is sufficient to be notified, and this is to prevent the suspended image HA (fire column suspended) from being hidden by the vertical scroll display of the decorative pattern. On the other hand, when a variation stop command from the main control board 100 is received, the decorative design is preferentially displayed over the reserved image HA and the changing image HB during the fixed stop display of the decorative design. The decorative pattern layers R102 to R104 are assigned higher than the HA layer R105. The reason for this is to clearly notify the player of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols during the fixed stop display of the decorative symbols, as described above (visual recognition of the stopped symbol combination of the decorative symbols by means of the pending image HA, etc.). (This is to prevent deterioration in performance). The background image layer R101 is always arranged below the decorative pattern layers R102 to R104 and the reserved image HA layer R105. As a further modification of the first modification, even during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are preferentially displayed over the pending image HA and the changing image HB, just like during the fixed stop display of the decorative symbols. In order to do so, the decorative pattern layers R102 to R104 may be assigned higher than the layer R105 of the reserved image HA. In addition, in the first modified example, the specifications for switching the above-mentioned display priority including further modified examples are adopted for the special display mode (pillar of fire icon), but the other display mode (round icon) also If it is displayed in a superimposed manner with the decoration pattern that is being displayed still, the specifications for switching the above-mentioned display priority, including a further modified example similar to the special display mode (pillar of fire icon), may be adopted. In addition, in the normal mode, while the above display priority switching specifications including further modifications are applied, in other modes (for example, the suppression chance mode), it is configured so that the superimposed display is not performed. By not adopting the above-mentioned display priority switching specifications including further modifications, or by preferentially displaying the decorative pattern even if the superimposed display is performed, or by preferentially displaying the pending image and the changing image It may be configured so as not to employ the specification for switching the display priority described above, including the modified example.

Next, an example of the pending change effect in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing an effect example of the pending change effect in the first modified example.

As shown in (A) in the figure, during the execution of a certain variation display (the N-th variation display), a new first special symbol actuation suspension ball is generated by the start winning, and this actuation suspension ball (trigger suspension ), the second pending image HA2 corresponding to the pending order is displayed. In the figure, according to the ball entry order of the operation pending ball of the first special symbol at this point, the first pending image is "HA1", and the second pending image (trigger pending pending image) is "HA2". , and a changing image to be displayed in a changing manner is indicated by "HB0". Note that the pending images HA1 to HA2 and the changing image HB0 are all displayed in the normal display mode (white icons).

As shown in (B) in the figure, when the N-th change display is completed, the earliest pending image HA1 is digested, thereby shifting to the changing display area 720 and switching to the changing image HB1, and each of the pending images The image HA2 shifts to the left, and the next variable display (N+1th variable display) is started. At this time, the display mode of the hold image HA2 related to the trigger hold is changed from the normal display mode (white icon) to the special display mode 2 (icon inside the pillar of fire), and the white icon is hidden by the icon inside the pillar of fire on the screen. is displayed (displayed as if concealing how the display color of the round icon will change thereafter). During the variable display of the decorative pattern (including the start of the variable display), the reserved image HA2 and the changing image HB1 are preferentially displayed over the decorative pattern, and the display mode of the reserved image HA2 and the changing image HB1 and the reserved image are displayed. The state of change can be clearly visually recognized by the player.

As shown in (C) in the figure, the (N+2)th variation display ends, and the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. During the stationary display of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are displayed preferentially over the suspended image HA2 and the changing image HB1, so that the stationary symbol combination of the decorative symbols can be clearly recognized.

As shown in (D) in the figure, the earliest suspended image (held image related to trigger suspension) HA2 is digested to shift to the changing image display area 720 and switch to the changing image HB2.

As shown in (E) in the figure, when the changing image HB2 (icon inside the pillar of fire) relating to the pending trigger reaches the changing image display area 720, the flame of the icon inside the pillar of fire becomes stronger for a moment as a pending change effect.

As shown in (F) in the figure, immediately after the pending change fan effect is performed (immediately after the flame of the icon in the pillar of fire becomes stronger), the display mode of the changing image HB2 changes from the special display mode 2 (icon in the pillar of fire). It changes to the special display mode 3 (golden icon), and the variable display (N+2th variable display) is started. At this time, when the flame of the pillar of fire icon disappears on the screen, it seems as if the golden icon hidden behind it suddenly appears. That is, while the pillar of fire icon is being displayed, the white icon hidden behind the pillar of fire icon has already changed to a red icon. In this way, although the display mode of the pending image HA2 has changed from the white icon to the pillar of fire icon, and the display mode of the changing image HB2 has changed from the pillar of fire icon to the red icon, the icon behind the pillar of fire icon can be shown as a pseudo pending change effect such that the round icon changes from a white icon to a red icon, and it is possible to create an unprecedented novel pending change effect.

<Modified Example 2 of Hold Change Effect: Motion Display>
Next, Modified Example 2 of the hold change effect of the present embodiment will be described. Modification 2 basically has the same configuration as the above-described present embodiment. I will explain the part.

In this modified example, as the normal display modes of the pending image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode, a plurality of types of normal display modes corresponding to the stay stage are provided. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the pending image HA and the changing image HB in Modification 2. As shown in FIG.

In this modification, as the display modes of the pending image HA and the changing image HB, a plurality of types of normal display modes 1 to 3 are set according to the stay stage in the normal mode. In other words, when the presentation mode during the current stay is the normal mode, the normal display mode (default display) of the pending image HA and the changing image HB is configured to differ according to the stay stage. In this modification, a plurality of types of normal stages (first stage, second stage, third stage) with different types of effects are set as stay stages in the normal mode. Then, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, when winning a stage transition lottery that is performed every predetermined number of variable display times), the stay stage in the normal mode is switched. The background image in this normal stage differs from each other according to the type of the transition destination stage. (For example, during the daytime stage), the "daytime background image" is displayed, and when staying at the third stage (for example, the night stage), the "nighttime background image" is displayed. Here, selection candidates for the notice effect and the SP ready-to-win effect are different depending on each stage. SP reach A-1, B-1, and C-1, in which enemy character a appears, are candidates for selection as SP reach effects. The announcement effect related to the friend character c is a selection candidate, SP reach A-2, B-2, and C-2 in which the enemy character b appears is a selection candidate as the SP reach effect, and the friend character a is the third stage announcement effect. and the announcement effect related to the ally character d are candidates for selection, and SP reach A-3, B-3, and C-3, in which the enemy character c appears, are candidates for selection as the SP reach effect.

Here, among the plurality of types of normal display modes 1 to 3, the normal display mode 1 is a display mode corresponding to the first stage, the normal display mode 2 is a display mode corresponding to the second stage, and the normal display mode 3 is a display mode corresponding to the third stage. The normal display mode 1 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a round icon imitating a round shape. The normal display mode 2 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a flag icon imitating a flag. The normal display mode 3 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a heart icon imitating a heart.

Special display modes 1 to 5 are display modes common to all stages, regardless of the stage currently being stayed. Here, the special display mode 1 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a rhombic icon imitating a rhombus, and the display color of the icon is blue. The special display mode 2 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a rhombic icon imitating a rhombus, and the display color of the icon is green. Special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a rhombic icon imitating a rhombus, and the display color of the icon is red. Special display mode 4 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a rhombic icon imitating a rhombus, and the display color of the icon is gold. Special display mode 5 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a rhombic icon imitating a rhombus, and the display color of the icon is rainbow. As a further modification, the blue icon/green icon, which have relatively low expectations for big hits, are displayed in a display mode corresponding to each stage (specifically, the display colors of the image shapes of the normal display modes 1 to 3 are changed. Blue icon/green icon), and red icon/gold icon/rainbow icon with relatively low expectation of big win may be in special display modes 3 to 5 common to all stages.

In this modification, when the display mode of the pending image HA or the changing image HB is the normal display mode, the holding image HA or the changing image HB is displayed in motion (also referred to as "motion display").
A motion effect is executed to make The image control board 300 stores moving image data for operatively displaying the pending image HA and the changing image HB. The playback time of this moving image data is 2 seconds, and the moving image data is video data recording continuous motion from the first image to the last image. Then, by repeatedly playing (loop playing) the moving image data for two seconds, a motion effect is performed in which the holding image or the changing image repeats a predetermined action display (motion display). In this modification, the movement of the pending image HA between the image display areas as it undergoes pending digestion is called a "shift", and the pending image HA itself or the changing image HB itself moves within each image display area. This is called "motion". However, the pending image HA or the changing image HB may move beyond each image display area, and the adjacent held images HA, or the holding image HA and the changing image HB may at least partly You may operate|move by the display mode superimposed front and back in .

FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram for explaining the motion effects of the pending image HA and the changing image HB in the second modified example. In the motion effect, one cycle is from when each icon starts a predetermined action to when it ends (until the series of actions from the beginning to the end of the predetermined action is completed), and the motion display of this cycle is repeated. It is a performance. In this modification, different motion patterns are set for each of the normal display modes 1-3. The round icon (normal display mode 1) is set with a series of motion patterns in which the round icon expands and contracts vertically. The flag icon (normal display mode 2) is set with a series of motion patterns in which the flag cloth portion of the flag icon flutters and sways in the wind. The heart icon (normal display mode 3) is set with a series of motion patterns in which the heart icon rotates around the central axis. In this modification, for any of the icons (normal display modes 1 to 3), "2 seconds" is set as the motion display cycle (that is, the playback time of the video data), and this "2 seconds" is set as one cycle. is repeatedly executed. Here, in the special display modes 1 to 5, a predetermined motion display may similarly be repeatedly executed with "2 seconds" as one cycle, or the display modes may be further differentiated from the normal display modes 1 to 3. For this reason, a predetermined motion display may be repeatedly executed with "one second" as one period. As another modification, special display modes 1 to 5 may be configured so that no motion display is performed. As a further modified example, the cycle of the action display of the pending image HA and the changing image HB may be substantially matched with the cycle of the variable display of the decorative symbols (the cycle of one scroll display). Further, in this embodiment, the operation display period (2 seconds) of the pending image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode is set to = 3 seconds), and when any of the main variation patterns and main variation additional patterns is selected, the pending image HA and the varying image HB are configured to perform motion display for at least one cycle. However, the period of operation display of the normal mode pending image HA and the changing image HB may be substantially matched with the shortest time of the normal mode variable display time, or the normal mode pending image HA and the variable The cycle of motion display of the middle image HB may be set longer than the shortest variable display time in the normal mode.

In the normal display modes 1 to 3, a reference motion posture (first image of moving image data) serving as a starting point of each motion display is set. When the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the motion display is started with this reference motion posture as the starting point, and the motion display is resumed from the standard motion posture every time a predetermined cycle (2 seconds) is reached (loop playback is performed). ). On the other hand, the motion display of the pending image HA and the changing image HB is forcibly terminated when the variable display of the decorative pattern ends. Then, with the start of the variable display of the next decorative pattern as a trigger, the pending image HA and the changing image HB are switched to the standard motion posture, and the motion display is started with this standard motion posture as a starting point (reproduced in a loop). ). Note that when the new pending image HA is displayed, the motion display is started with the reference motion posture as the starting point, regardless of the motion display of the existing pending image HA and the changing image HB. That is, except when the existing pending image HA and the changing image HB are in the reference motion posture, the motion display of the new pending image HA and the motion display of the existing pending image HA and the changing image HB are mutually They are not synchronized, and there is a deviation in their operating postures. However, the motion display of the new pending image HA and the motion display of the existing pending image HA and the moving image HB are synchronized with each other when the next variable display is started. Note that, in this modified example, the motion display being “synchronized” means that the motion display of each of the holding image HA and the changing image HB has the same timing as the reference motion posture. In other words, on the premise that each pending image HA and the changing image HB have the same motion cycle, each pending image HA and the changing image HB can take the same motion posture at any timing during the motion display. be.

Next, an example of motion effects of the pending image HA and the changing image HB will be described. FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram showing an example of motion effects in the second modified example. In this production example, the production stage is the third stage, and the holding image HA corresponding to the operation holding ball of the first special symbol and the changing image HB corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol are displayed. be.

As shown in (A) in the figure, with the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the N-th variable display) as a trigger, the pending images HA1 and HA2 and the changing image HB0 are displayed in motion with the reference motion posture as the starting point. to start. In addition, in the figure, according to the ball entry order of the operation reserved ball of the first special symbol at this point, the first reserved image is indicated by "HA1", and the second reserved image is indicated by "HA2". The changing image to be displayed is represented by "HB0".

As shown in (B) in the figure, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, a motion display is performed in which the pending images HA1 and HB2 and the variable image HB0 rotate about their own central axes. At this time, the motion displays of the pending images HA1 and HA2 and the moving image HB0 are synchronized with each other (they are in the same motion mode). (B) in the drawing shows a state in which the pending images HA1 and HB1 and the moving image HB0 are rotated 90 degrees from the reference motion posture.

As shown in (C) in the figure, by the occurrence of the operation pending ball of the new first special symbol, the third pending image (new pending image) HA3 corresponding to the pending order is in the standard motion posture. Appear. At this time, the existing pending images HA1 and HA2 and the changing image HB0 are displaced to a motion posture rotated by about 180 degrees with respect to the reference motion posture. Therefore, the motion display of the new pending image HA3 is started in an asynchronous state (a state in which the motion posture is displaced) with respect to the motion display of the existing pending images HA1 and HA2.

As shown in (D) in the figure, the new pending image HA3 rotates around its own central axis while taking a motion posture shifted by about 180 degrees with respect to the existing pending images HA1 and HA2 and the changing image HB0. Display the motion to

As shown in (E) in the figure, the motion display of the pending images HA1 to HA3 and the changing image HB0 is forcibly stopped when the variable display of the decorative symbols is completed. In (E) of the figure, the pending images HA1 and HA2 and the changing image HB0 are forcibly stopped in a motion posture rotated approximately 90 degrees from the standard motion posture, and the pending image HA3 is rotated approximately 270 degrees from the standard motion posture. It shows a state of being forcibly stopped in the operating posture.

As shown in (F) in the figure, when the variable display of the decorative symbols is completed, the first pending image HA1 is shifted to the variable image display area 720 while maintaining the forced stop posture, and the variable image HB1 is displayed. , and the subsequent held images HA2 and HA3 are shifted to the left while maintaining the forced stop posture.

As shown in (G) in the figure, with the start of the next variable display of the decorative pattern (N+1th variable display), the pending images HA2 and HB3 and the changing image HB1 are switched to the reference motion posture, Motion display is started with this reference motion posture as a starting point. That is, when the variable display is started, the motion display of the pending image HA3 and the motion display of the pending image HA2 and the changing image HB1 are synchronized with each other.

As shown in (H) in the figure, the motion display of the suspended images HA2 and HA3 and the changing image HB1 is performed with 2 seconds as one cycle until the variable display of the decorative pattern (N+1th variable display) is completed. Displayed repeatedly.

In addition, in the second modification described above, when a new pending image is displayed due to the start winning, the motion display of the new pending image HA does not synchronize with the motion display of the existing pending image HA and the changing image HB. (Excluding the case where the existing pending image HA and the changing image HB are in the standard motion posture), but it is not limited to this configuration, and a new pending image is created by starting winning. is displayed, the motion display of the new pending image HA may be performed in synchronization with the motion display of the existing pending image HA and the changing image HB. In that case, the following two methods (1) and (2) can be cited as methods for synchronizing each motion display. (1) By making a new pending image HA appear in the same motion posture as the current motion posture of the existing pending image HA and the changing image HB, and starting the motion display of this new pending image HA, the existing Synchronize with the motion display of the pending image HA and the moving image HB. (2) After the new pending image HA appears in the standard motion posture, the motion postures of the existing pending image HA and the changing image HB become the standard motion posture (that is, the existing pending image HA and When the motion display for one period of the changing image HB is completed, the motion display of this new pending image HA is started to synchronize with the motion display of the existing pending image HA and the changing image HB.

Further, in the above-described second modification, the motion display of the pending image HA and the moving image HB is started when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished. Although the configuration is such that the motion display of the pending image HA and the changing image HB is terminated (forced stop), the present invention is not limited to this configuration. It may be configured to continuously execute regardless of the start and end of display. That is, the motion display of the pending image HA and the changing image HB is continued without ending (forcibly stopped) when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished, and the motion display is performed between the variable display of the decorative pattern each time. It may be configured to be connected continuously (seamlessly) without interruption. In that case, when a new pending image HA is displayed due to the start winning, the motion display of this new pending image HA is started in synchronization with the motion display of the existing pending image HA and the changing image HB. is preferred. At that time, the method for synchronizing each motion display is the same as the two methods (1) and (2) described above. Further, when the motion display of the pending image HA and the changing image HB is continued regardless of the start and end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, even when the pending image HA shifts to the left side due to the pending digestion, the pending image It is preferable to let the motion display of HA continue. However, the motion display of the reserved image HA may be stopped only while the reserved image HA is shifted to the left side due to the reserved digestion, and the motion display may be restarted after the reserved image HA is shifted.

Furthermore, in the second modification described above, the motion display is performed when the pending image HA and the changing image HB are in the normal display mode in all normal stages, but the configuration is not limited to this. , when staying in a predetermined normal stage out of a plurality of normal stages, the motion display of the pending image HA and the changing image HB is not performed even if the holding image HA and the changing image HB are in the normal display mode. can be configured to That is, among the plurality of types of normal display modes 1 to 3, the normal display mode without motion display may be set. In the normal display mode in which no motion display is performed, instead of performing no motion display, light emission display (for example, blinking display of the pending image HA and the changing image HB) is performed in the same cycle as the operation cycle of other motion displays. may

In addition, in the second modification described above, the motion display is performed only when the pending image HA and the changing image HB are in the normal display mode, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pending image HA And even when the image during fluctuation HB is in the special display mode (or only when the suspended image HA and the image during fluctuation HB are in the special display mode), the motion display may be performed. Furthermore, in the second modification described above, the special display mode of the pending image HA and the changing image HB is configured as a common display mode for each normal stage. The special display mode of the middle image HB may be configured as a different display mode depending on the type of stay stage. Alternatively, one of the pending image HA and the changing image HB may be motion-displayed, and the other of the pending image HA and the changing image HB may not be motion-displayed. In addition, when a hold occurs, a hold occurrence display may be provided, which is a production that gradually appears from a situation in which no hold image exists. until the entire image is displayed) is, for example, 0.3 seconds, and it is desirable to set the performance time to be short compared to the motion display. In addition, when a new hold occurs during the hold occurrence display related to a certain hold image and a new hold occurrence display is performed, the previous hold occurrence display is not forcibly terminated, and the previous hold occurrence display and the subsequent hold occurrence display (new) pending occurrence display of . Also, when the pending image shifts to the left side due to pending digestion, it will move from the current position of the pending image (position before shift display) to the position after movement (position after shift display). A certain shift display effect may be provided, and the shift display effect is, for example, 0.7 seconds, which is a short effect time compared to the motion display and a long effect time compared to the pending occurrence display. It is desirable to This shift display effect can be performed concurrently with the suspension occurrence display when the suspension occurrence timing and the suspension consumption timing are substantially the same timing. Also, when the hold image is shift displayed (moved) in the shift display effect, the motion display of the hold image is stopped, and the hold image is fixedly displayed in the standard motion posture from the start of the shift display to the middle of the shift display. After the shift display (after the end of the shift display effect), the motion display may be restarted from the reference motion posture.

[Battle effect/Meter effect]
Next, the “battle effect” and the “meter effect” will be described as characteristic effects that are executed when the effect mode is the Gento Rush mode.

<Battle production>
As described above, the battle effect is a effect of notifying the result of the determination of whether the special symbol is right or wrong and the type of the big win according to the result (win or lose) of the teammate character's battle with the enemy character. In the present embodiment, when the effect mode currently being executed is the gento rush mode, when the change display develops into SP reach, a battle effect in which a friend character battles an enemy character is developed as the reach effect. Then, in the present embodiment, when the battle effect occurs (when it develops into SP reach), the winning of the jackpot is confirmed, and depending on the result (win or lose) of this battle effect, either a "specific jackpot" or a "normal jackpot" is selected. It is intended to suggest or notify whether you have been elected.

First, the production flow of the battle production in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram showing the production flow of the battle production in this embodiment. In the figure, the basic flow of the battle production is shown chronologically from left to right on the page.

First, as shown in FIG. 53, after the variable display is started, a step-up effect (ST101) is performed as an advance notice effect before establishing a ready-to-win state. The step-up performance is a development type performance that changes the performance mode step by step according to a predetermined order, and suggests or informs the degree of expectation for a big hit according to the number of stages that develop. . The step-up effect consists of the first step-up effect consisting only of the first effect step SU1 of the three-stage effect steps (SU1, SU2, SU3), and the second step-up effect which develops to the second effect step SU2. There are a 2 step-up effect and a 3rd step-up effect that develops to the 3rd stage effect step SU3. Subsequently, after an opponent character selection effect (ST102) for selecting an opponent for a battle effect from among a plurality of enemy characters displayed on the screen is performed, a ready-to-win inciting effect (ST102) is performed to incite whether or not the reach is established. ST103) is executed. After this ready-to-win effect (ST103) is performed, if the ready-to-win is not established (ST104), it is determined that the game is "lost", and the variable display ends (ST105). On the other hand, when the reach is established and develops into the SP reach, it is determined that a "jackpot" will occur at that point, and thereafter, a battle production is developed in which the ally character battles the enemy character (the enemy character selected by the player). (ST106 to ST128).

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of performance routes 1 to 5 are prepared as performance routes for battle performance, and victory or defeat of battle performance is derived through different performance processes for each of the performance routes. Roughly speaking, production route 1 is a normal jackpot route with the result of the battle production being "defeat", and production routes 2 to 5 are routes for specific big wins with the battle production result being "victory". . In the present embodiment, in any of the production routes 1 to 5, the result of the battle production is changed at the time when the production in which the friendly character attacks the enemy character appears (when the friendly attack production occurs, which will be described later). It is a specification that "winning" (winning a specific jackpot) is determined.

At the branch point of each of the production routes 1 to 5, a branching production is performed to suggest which of the plurality of production routes 1 to 5 the game will proceed to. In this embodiment, branching effects 1 (preemptive fanning effect: ST107), branching effect 2 (enemy preemptive fanning effect: ST112), branching effect 3 (enemy attack avoidance fanning effect: ST119), branching effect 4 (role trick effect: ST125) is set.

Branching effect 1 (preemptive fanning effect: ST107) moves to "presentation route 2" where the preemptive attack is routed by the allied character by inciting whether the ally character or the enemy character will perform the preemptive attack. This is an effect suggesting whether the enemy character will move to the "effect route 1, 3, 4, 5", which is the route for the enemy character to make a preemptive attack.

In the branch effect 2 (enemy preemptive inciting effect: ST112), by inciting whether the enemy character's preemptive attack will be a single blow or a series of attacks, will the preemptive attack shift to the "production route 3" where the preemptive attack will be a single blow? , is a production that suggests whether the route will shift to "production route 1, 4, 5", which is a route in which the preemptive attack is repeated.

Branch effect 3 (enemy attack avoidance prompting effect: ST119) is to prompt whether or not the attack of the enemy character can be evaded, and whether to transition to "effect route 4", which is a route for successfully avoiding the attack, or to avoid it. This is an effect that suggests whether to shift to "effect route 1, 5", which is a route that fails.

In the branching effect 4 (role object incitement effect: ST125), whether or not the character object will appear in front of the screen is aroused, and whether or not the character object will shift to the "production route 5", which is the route to succeed in the appearance of the character object. This is an effect that suggests whether to shift to "effect route 1", which is a route that fails to appear.

Therefore, production route 1 goes through four branching productions, production route 2 goes through one branching production, production route 3 goes through two branching productions, and production route 4 goes through three branching productions. , and the production route 5 goes through four branch productions. Therefore, all the production routes 1 to 5 are routes that pass through at least one branch production.

Specifically, the production route 1 is as follows: battle start production (ST106) → preemptive incitement production (ST107) → enemy preemptive incitement production (ST112) → enemy attack repeated production (ST118) → enemy attack avoidance incitement production (ST119) → enemy attack. The production progresses in the flow of avoidance failure production (ST124)->character trick production (ST125)->defeat production (ST128).

Production route 2 is produced in the flow of battle start production (ST106) → pre-emptive agitation production (ST107) → ally pre-emptive production (ST108) → ally attack production (ST109) → character movement production (ST110) → victory production (ST111). advances.

Effect route 3 is: battle start effect (ST106)→preemptive provoke effect (ST107)→enemy preemptive provoke effect (ST112)→enemy attack continuous hit effect (ST113)→enemy attack avoidance effect (ST114)→ally attack effect (ST115)→ The production progresses in the flow of the role object movable production (ST116) → the victory production (ST117).

Production route 4 is a battle start production (ST106)→preemptive incitement production (ST107)→enemy preemptive incitement production (ST112)→enemy attack continuous hit production (ST118)→enemy attack avoidance incitement production (ST119)→enemy attack avoidance success production (ST119) ST120) → teammate attack presentation (ST121) → character movement presentation (ST122) → victory presentation (ST123).

Effect route 5 is a battle start effect (ST106)→preemptive provoke effect (ST107)→enemy preemptive provoke effect (ST112)→enemy attack continuous hit effect (ST118)→enemy attack evasion provoke effect (ST119)→enemy attack avoidance failure effect (ST119) ST124)->rocketing effect (ST125)->role moveable effect (ST126)->victory effect (ST127).

Here, the victory effect (ST111, ST117, ST123, ST127) means the effect for definitively informing that the result of the battle effect is victory (that the "specific jackpot" has been won). In addition, the defeat effect (ST128) means an effect that definitely notifies that the result of the battle effect is defeat (that the player has won the "normal jackpot").

<Meter effect>
Next, the meter effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 54(A) is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen for meter effects. In this embodiment, when the effect mode is the phantom battle rush mode, basically, the meter effect is executed in all the variable displays during the stay in this phantom battle rush mode. This meter effect is a effect of changing the level of the meter image displayed on the screen (also referred to as "meter value") during execution of the variable display. The meter image is displayed in the meter display area 740 on the left side of the screen, and is a vertically long image showing levels from "1" to "10", for example. The meter effect is performed for each variable display unit (execution of the meter effect is started at the start of the variable display of each time, and the execution of the meter effect is completed at the time of the stop of the variable display of each time). The level of the meter image is zero-cleared (reset) at the start of each variable display or at the end of the variable display. In the present embodiment, when the level of the meter image reaches MAX (tenth stage), it is confirmed that the result of the battle effect is victory. Therefore, the level of the meter image can be said to be an index indicating the degree of expectation that the result of the battle production will be victory (probability-variable expectation).

In this embodiment, a meter counter is provided as counting means for controlling the level (meter value) of the meter image. The count value of this meter counter is an internal numerical value (referred to as "internal numerical value") corresponding to the level (meter value) of the meter image, and this internal numerical value can be updated in units of "1". . Then, as shown in FIG. 54(B), each time the internal numerical value of the meter counter increases by "10", the level of the meter image increases by "one step". Therefore, when the internal numerical value increases to the maximum value (100), the level of the meter image reaches MAX (tenth stage). The internal numerical value of this meter counter is cleared to zero (reset) at the start of each fluctuation display or at the end of each fluctuation display.

As shown in FIG. 53, the internal numerical value of the meter counter can be increased or decreased at a plurality of timings T1 to T7 set during the variable display. Of these timings T1 to T7, the timing T1 is the timing before the ready-to-win state is established, and the timings T2 to T7 are the timings after the ready-to-win state is established (after the battle develops). Specifically, the timing T1 is the timing during the period in which the step-up announcement effect (ST101) is being executed. Timing T2 is the timing during the period during which the battle start effect (ST106) is being executed. Timing T3 is the timing during the period when the enemy's preemptive fanning effect (ST112) is being executed. Timing T4 is the timing during the period during which the enemy attack avoidance encouragement effect (ST124) is being executed. Timings T5, T6, and T7 are timings during the period during which the teammate attack presentation (ST109, ST115, ST121) is being executed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(C), the upper limit value of the internal numerical value of the meter counter is set for each timing T1 to T7. In other words, the upper limit value of the internal numerical value is the limit value of the internal numerical value that can be obtained during each timing T1 to T7. Therefore, the internal numerical value of the meter counter will not increase beyond the upper limit value assigned to the timings T1 to T7 during the current stay, and will remain within the upper limit value until each timing T1 to T7 ends. Only increments within are allowed. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the internal numerical value is "20" for timing T1, "40" for timing T2, "60" for timing T3, and "100" for timings T4, T5, T6, and T7. They are assigned respectively, and basically the upper limit value becomes higher at later timings T1 to T7 in chronological order.

Here, as described above, the maximum value (100) is set as the upper limit value of the internal numerical value at the latter timings T4 to T7. Timing T4 is a scene in which the result of the battle production is greatly influenced by the question of whether or not the friendly character can avoid the attack of the enemy character (or whether it can withstand the attack). The internal numerical value can reach the maximum value (100) on condition that the number of operations of the effect button 15 by the player reaches a specified number of times. In addition, since the timings T5 to T7 are the timings at which the allied characters attack (the result of the battle effect is determined to be victory), the internal numerical value is forcibly set to the maximum value ( 100). Therefore, at the timings T5 to T7, the effect that the ally character attacks the enemy character and the effect that the meter image reaches the MAX level are the confirmed effects that definitely notify that the result of the battle effect is victory. (Specific big hit confirmed production). As the execution timing of this confirmation effect, the timing when the friendly character attacks and the timing when the meter image reaches the MAX level may be different, and the meter image reaches the MAX level after the friendly character attacks. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the friendly character attacks after the meter image reaches the MAX level.

Further, among the plurality of timings T1 to T7, the enemy's preemptive provocation effect (S112) and the enemy attack avoidance provocation effect (ST124) performed at timings T3 and T4 progress as predetermined effects are performed by the player's operation of the effect button 15. It is configured as a button effect (operation request effect). During the execution of the enemy preemptive provocation effect (S112) and the enemy attack avoidance provocation effect (ST124), an operation valid period (hereinafter referred to as "first operation valid period") during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid is set. It is During the first operation effective period, for example, a notification effect is performed on the screen or the like to indicate that the operation of the effect button 15 is valid or to prompt an operation input. Then, during execution of the enemy's preemptive provocation effect (S112) and the enemy attack avoidance provocation effect (ST124), a numerical value corresponding to the number of operations of the effect button 15 is added to the internal numerical value. On the other hand, the effects (battle start effect, ally attack effect) performed at the other timings T1 to T2 and T5 to T7 are non-button effects (non-operation request) that progress even if the player does not operate the effect button 15. production). Therefore, during execution of this non-button effect, a predetermined value (fixed value, lottery value, etc.) is automatically added to the internal numerical value even if the player does not operate the effect button 15 .

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, during the period during which the meter effect is being executed, the effect button 15 can be operated and input during all periods other than the first operation effective period. A valid period (hereinafter referred to as a "second operation valid period" to be conceptually distinguished from the first operation valid period) is set, but the second operation valid period is a period outside the first operation valid period. It may be only the partial period (for example, only the timings of T2 and T5). Unlike the first operation valid period, the second operation valid period is a period in which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid without explicitly prompting the player to operate the effect button 15 . In other words, during the second operation valid period, no notification effect is performed for indicating that the operation of the effect button 15 is valid or for prompting the operation input. As a result, during the execution period of the meter effect, even if the effect button 15 is operated during the first operation valid period or if the effect button 15 is operated during the second operation valid period, the effect button by the player. By operating 15, it becomes possible to increase the internal numerical value (the level of the meter image can be increased). Below, in order to clearly distinguish the operation of the effect button 15 performed during the first operation effective period and the operation of the effect button 15 performed during the second operation effective period, the effect performed during the first operation effective period will be described. The operation of the button 15 is also called "front button operation", and the operation of the effect button 15 performed during the second operation valid period is also called "back button operation". Here, as a modification, an effect of increasing the level of the meter effect (effect of changing the display mode of the meter effect) is generated by operating the effect button 15 during the first operation valid period, but during the second operation valid period Even if the performance button 15 is operated, the performance for increasing the level of the meter performance is not generated, but another performance, for example, an effect simulating a flame is generated around the screen, and the intensity of the flame is gradually increased. You may generate the production|presentation which changes. There are 20 levels of flame intensity, and depending on the level, it is structured to suggest the possibility of shifting to a variable expectation (if you use the meter effect even in normal mode, the expectation of a big hit) or a branch with a high degree of expectation. good too. That is, in this modification, there are two effects (front button effect) generated based on the operation of the front button during the first operation valid period, and effects generated based on the operation of the back button during the second operation valid period (back button effect). are configured as different productions. In addition, using the same meter image, the meter display that is added when the front button is operated and the meter display that is added when the back button is operated may be displayed in different display modes (for example, the meter image is added when the front button is operated). The meter display is blue, and the meter display added by pressing the back button is red).

In this embodiment, at the end of each timing T1-T7, if the internal numerical value of the meter counter does not reach the predetermined upper limit assigned to each timing T1-T7, the upper limit is reached by the player operating the back button. Complementation of internal numerical values up to is possible. That is, at the end of a certain timing out of the plurality of timings T1 to T9, if the internal numerical value does not reach the upper limit value assigned to the certain timing, the next timing will be determined with this upper limit value as the limit. Until it arrives, the internal numerical value can be increased complementarily by operating the back button. For example, timing T3 is assigned an upper limit value of "60", but if the internal numerical value does not reach the upper limit value (60) before timing T3 ends, the next timing By the player operating the back button before reaching T4, the internal numerical value can be increased up to the upper limit (60).

As a modified example, the internal numerical value that can be increased by the back button operation is set to unlimited (however, the maximum value is limited to "100"), and when the back button is operated exceptionally, each The configuration may be such that the internal numerical value can be increased beyond the specified upper limit value set at timings T1 to T9. In other words, even before the timing (timings T6 to T9) when the upper limit of the internal numerical value is set to the maximum value (100) arrives, the player can freely operate the back button at any desired timing. By making the level of the meter image reach the MAX level (10 steps) early, the result of the battle production can be quickly known. As a result, the player's motivation for button operation can be further enhanced, and a synergistic effect between the battle effect and the meter effect can give a strong impact to the player.

In addition, as a modified example, in the variable display during the Gento Rush mode, the meter image may be configured to be switchable between normal display and enlarged display. At the start of the variable display, the meter image is normally displayed, before the battle of the variable display develops, the meter image is enlarged only at timings T1 to T3, and after the battle develops in the variable display, it is always displayed (all timings T4 to It is preferable that the meter image is enlarged and displayed during the entire period after SP reach including T9.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the production mode in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game, not only when the production mode is the phantom battle rush mode (variable probability game state), but the production mode is Even in the suppression chance mode (probability variable game state, time reduction game state) or revenge mode (time reduction game state), the meter effect can be executed. Here, basically, the meter effect of the suppression chance mode or the revenge mode and the meter effect of the Gento Rush mode have the same configuration. However, when the production mode is the oppression chance mode or the revenge mode, the meter production is executed (the meter image is displayed) triggered by the development of the variable display into the SP reach (battle production). That is, when the production mode is the control chance mode or the revenge mode, the variable display is the variable display that triggers the execution of the battle production (that is, the variable display that the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a big hit). is the execution condition for the meter effect. Then, when the variable display develops into SP reach, the battle effect and the meter effect are started substantially at the same time. Therefore, when the production mode is the suppression chance mode or the revenge mode, the internal numerical value of the meter counter can be updated at the timings T2 to T7 set after the start of the battle production among the timings T1 to T7. Also, after the start of the battle effect, it is possible to update the internal numerical value of the meter count by operating the back button in the same manner as described above. On the other hand, before the battle effect develops, the back button operation is treated as invalid (the second operation effective period is not set before the battle effect develops).

Also, as a modification, the SP reach D may be generated even in the normal mode, and similar battle effects and meter effects may be executed. In that case, after executing the pseudo-continuous effect and special effect in the present embodiment and each modification, or executing the display of the pending image and the changing image including the pending change effect, so as to develop into SP reach D may be configured. In such a configuration, winning the battle production in the normal mode does not need to confirm the variable probability big win, but simply indicates that the big win is confirmed. Further, the level of the meter effect may be an index of the expectation of a big hit instead of an index of the expectation of the variable probability.

[Base control performance]
Next, the base suppression effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram showing the production flow of the suppression chance mode, and FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram showing the basic screen of the base suppression production. Base control effect, if the currently running effect mode is the control chance mode,
This is an effect suggesting the possibility that the suppression chance mode (high base state) will continue depending on whether or not the predetermined display value reaches the target value.

The period during which the suppression chance mode is executed is divided into a plurality of performance intervals corresponding to the number of times the special symbols are displayed. Specifically, immediately after entering the suppression chance mode, the first effect section is set for the 1st to 20th rotations, and the second effect section is set for the 21st to 40th rotations. , the third performance section is set from the 41st to the 60th rotation, and the fourth performance section is set from the 61st rotation onward (from the 61st rotation until the next big hit occurs). In the present embodiment, the number of stays in each effect section (excluding the fourth effect section) is set to "20 times" as the number of times the special symbols are changed, but each effect section (excluding the fourth effect section) may be set to different times.

Here, the first rendering section is a rendering section in which an image of a friendly character staying at the first base is displayed (a rendering section with the first base as a background image). The second production section is a production section in which an image of a friendly character staying at the second base is displayed (a production section with the second base as a background image). The third rendering section is a rendering section in which an image of a friendly character staying at the third base is displayed (a rendering section with the third base as a background image). The fourth rendering section is a rendering section (a rendering section with the fourth base as a background image) in which an image of a teammate character staying at the fourth base is displayed.

In the variable display of the final round (20th, 40th, and 60th rounds) of each production section, a base branch that suggests whether or not to move to the next production section (whether or not the suppression chance mode will continue) A performance is performed. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the final round of each effect section is a variable display of "missing", the base branch effect is executed. In addition, if the variable display of the final round of each production section is a variable display of "big hit", the battle production will be performed by moving from the base where you are currently staying to the central base (details will be described later). Below, for the sake of convenience, the base branching effect of the first effect section is “first base branching effect”, the base branching effect of the second effect section is “second base branching effect”, and the base branching effect of the third effect section is “second base branch effect”. It is also called "three-base branch production". Each base divergence production is a production that arouses whether or not the ally character can break through the final door installed at the base where the player is currently staying. If the ally character can break through the final door, it is suggested that the transition to the next base (next production section) succeeds and the suppression chance mode (high base state) continues. On the other hand, if the ally character cannot break through the final door, it is suggested that the transition to the next base (next production section) fails and the suppression chance mode (high base state) ends.

In the variable display except for the final times (20th, 40th, 60th) of each effect section, the base suppression effect is executed by adding or subtracting a predetermined numerical value. That is, this base suppression effect is performed in the variable display of the 1st to 19th rotations in the first effect section, the 21st to 39th rotations in the second effect section, and the 41st to 59th rotations in the third effect period. Below, for the sake of convenience, the base suppression effect in the first production section will be referred to as “first base suppression effect”, the base suppression effect in the second effect section will be referred to as “second base suppression effect”, and the base suppression effect in the third effect section will be referred to as “second base suppression effect”. 3 base suppression effect”, and the base suppression effect in the fourth effect section is also referred to as “fourth base suppression effect”.

The base suppression effect is a effect in which the remaining number (predetermined numerical value) of small fry characters (enemy characters with a lower relative rank) hiding in the base currently staying is reduced toward a target value. In this embodiment, "0" is set as the target value for the remaining number of small fish characters. As shown in FIG. 57, during execution of this base suppression effect, the remaining number of small fish characters ("500" in the illustrated example) is constantly displayed in a remaining number display area 751 on the screen. The remaining number of small fish characters is subtracted all at once at the end of each variable display. However, when staying in the fourth effect section (fourth base), the remaining number of enemy characters is always fixed at "0" (the remaining number is not added or subtracted). In addition, in the remaining number display area 752 on the screen, the remaining number of times of the suppression chance mode ("15 times" in the illustrated example) is displayed. However, this remaining number of times is counted down with the initial value set to "20 times" at the start of each effect section. There is a case where the remaining number of times is false (a case where the suppression chance mode continues after 20 rotations). Then, when the remaining number of times reaches "0" (that is, when the final time of each effect section is reached), a base branch effect is performed to suggest whether or not it is possible to shift to the next base. A map display area 753 on the screen displays the layout of each base, the position of the base where the user is currently staying, and the like. In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of maps are prepared, and the type of map is determined by an effect lottery performed when entering the suppression chance mode. Depending on the type of this map, the difficulty level of each base (that is, the number of times the suppression chan mode can be continued) is suggested.

In the present embodiment, when the number of minion characters remaining reaches the target value in each performance section, the base currently being stayed has been conquered (moving to the next base is definite). In other words, when the remaining number of small fish characters reaches the target value, it is determined that the base branch effect will be a successful effect in the final variation display in the current effect section (continuation of the suppression chance mode is determined). Therefore, the closer the number of remaining minion characters is to the target value, the higher is the expectation that the base branch effect performed in the final round of each base will be successful.

Here, FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram for explaining the base suppression effect table (progress pattern). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of base suppression effect tables 0 to 19 are set, and one of the base suppression effect tables is selected according to the type (symbol group) of the jackpot that triggered the shift to the suppression chance mode. is selected by lottery.

In the column of "base suppression effect table" in the figure, the number of the base suppression effect table is shown. In this embodiment, "initial value", "progress pattern", "cumulative upper limit value", etc., which will be described later, are defined for each type (number) of the base suppression effect table. The "initial value" in the figure means the initial value of the remaining number of enemy characters (initial value displayed at the start of the effect section). This initial value is set to one of "999", "500", "100", and "0", and the smaller the initial value, the more likely the number of remaining enemy characters will reach the target value. higher expectations.

Also, in the "progress pattern" column in the figure, In each variable display, the upper limit of the number of people that can be subtracted from the remaining number of small fish characters (the number of people to be subtracted) is shown. That is, in the present embodiment, an upper limit value (maximum value) for the number of minor fish characters to be subtracted is set for each variable display (the number cannot be subtracted beyond the upper limit value). Any one of "110", "50", "15", and "0" is set as the upper limit value of the number of people to be subtracted. In addition to the upper limit of the number of people to be subtracted, a lower limit of the number of people to be subtracted is also set in the present embodiment, although not shown. Specifically, a lower limit value of "100" corresponding to the upper limit value of "110", a lower limit value of "45" corresponding to the upper limit value of "50", and a lower limit value of "10" corresponding to the upper limit value of "15" are set. ing. Therefore, the combination of the upper limit value and the lower limit value defines the range (permissible subtraction range) in which the enemy character can be subtracted during each variable display. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining enemy characters can be subtracted within any of the allowable subtraction ranges of "100 to 110", "45 to 50", and "10 to 15". In this embodiment, the number of enemy characters to be subtracted is determined by lottery within the subtraction range. For example, if the allowable subtraction range is set to "10 to 15", the number of people to be subtracted is one of "10", "11", "12", "13", "14", and "15". One of them is determined by lottery, and the subtraction number is subtracted from the remaining number of enemy characters at the end of the variable display.

Further, the "cumulative upper limit" in the figure means the total value obtained by adding the upper limit of the number of people to be subtracted assigned to each variable display (a total of 19 variable displays). For example, in the base suppression effect table 0, the upper limit of the number of subtracted players is set to "50" for all variable displays, so the accumulated upper limit is "950 (50×19=950)". Here, when the base suppression effect tables 5 to 9, 13 to 14, and 17 to 19 in which the cumulative upper limit value is set equal to or higher than the initial value are selected, the remaining enemy characters Indicates that the number of people may reach the target value. On the other hand, when the base suppression effect tables 0 to 4, 10 to 12, 15 to 16 in which the cumulative upper limit value is set to be less than the initial value are selected, the remaining enemy characters are Indicates that the number of people is unlikely to reach the target value. In this embodiment, when the suppression chance mode is scheduled to end in the production section in which the user is currently staying, the remaining number of enemy characters reaches the target value during execution of the base suppression production (that is, suppression Suggesting the continuation of the chance mode), so as not to result in a false production result, the number of times this suppression chance mode continues (the jackpot type that triggered the transition to this suppression chance mode), the base suppression production pattern The selection candidates of are classified.

Next, FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram showing a lottery table for base suppression effects. In the figure, for each jackpot type (each pattern group A to D, F to H) for each production section, "○" is displayed in the selection candidate base suppression production table, and non-selection candidate base suppression "X" is attached to the production table. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the lottery table is configured as a common table in all the effect sections (except for the fourth effect section). You may prepare.

When staying in the first production section, for the jackpot types (symbol groups A, F) with the number of fluctuation time reductions (number of electric sapots) set to "20 times", the base control where the cumulative upper limit is less than the initial value Only the production table is a candidate for selection, but the jackpot types (symbol groups B, C, D, G, As for I), all base suppression effect patterns are candidates for selection.

When staying in the second production section, for the jackpot types (symbol groups B, G) with the number of fluctuation time reductions (number of electric sapots) set to "40 times", the cumulative upper limit number is less than the initial value Base control production Only the table is a candidate for selection, but for the jackpot types (symbol groups C, D, I) whose fluctuation time reduction frequency (electric power supply frequency) is set to "60 times" and "10000 times", all base suppression effects The table becomes a selection candidate.

When staying in the third production section, for the jackpot types (symbol groups C, I) with the number of fluctuation time reductions (number of electric sapots) set to "60 times", the cumulative upper limit number is less than the initial value. Only the production table is a candidate for selection, but for the jackpot type (symbol group D) in which the number of fluctuation time reductions (the number of electrical sapo) is set to "10000 times", all base suppression production tables are candidates for selection.

In this embodiment, by allocating the type of the base suppression effect table based on the relationship between the number of stays in each effect section and the number of variable time reductions (number of electric sapo times) given to each jackpot type, the base suppression effect There is no discrepancy between the effect result and the actual effect mode transition result. In the figure, the numbers used in the lottery are omitted for the sake of convenience. range) is set, and the type of base suppression effect table is determined based on which determination number the lottery random number belongs to.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the first to fourth performance sections, if the result of the special symbol win/fail judgment is a big hit, the base currently staying (first base, second base, third base) , fourth
base) to a central base. After moving to this central base, a battle effect is performed in which a friendly character fights an enemy character (boss character). In the battle presentation, if the ally character wins, it is suggested that the ``special jackpot'' has been won, and if the ally character is defeated, it is suggested that the ``normal jackpot'' has been won. This battle effect basically has the same configuration as the battle effect in the Gento Rush mode described above, and a detailed description thereof (such as the route of the battle effect) will be omitted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the predetermined value (the number of remaining small fish characters) reaches the target value, the success of the base branching effect (the electric support state continues, or the number of electric support However, it is not limited to this configuration. With the arrival as a trigger, the current gaming state may be configured to determine that it is an advantageous gaming state (eg, probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state, latent certain gaming state).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the predetermined value (the number of remaining small fish characters) is decreased each time the variable display of the special symbols is performed. The predetermined value may be increased each time the pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and instead of reducing the remaining number of characters toward the target value of "0", the number of small fish characters defeated may be set as the target value. It may be a production mode in which the number is added toward "1000".

[Remaining count notification effect]
Next, the remaining number of times notification effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a schematic diagram showing an effect example of the remaining number of times notification effect and the mode branching effect. The remaining number of times notification effect is an effect of notifying the remaining number of times until the number of times of the variable display reaches the predetermined number of times in the predetermined number of times of the variable display immediately after shifting from the suppression chance mode to the special mode. In this embodiment, "10 times" is set as the predetermined number of times. Therefore, during the variable display of 10 rotations (during the variable display from the 1st to the 10th rotation) immediately after shifting to the special mode, the remaining number of times until the number of times of variation display reaches the predetermined number (10 times) is notified. be done.

The remaining number of times is displayed in a countdown form on the screen, and "1" is subtracted each time the special symbol is displayed once. Of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays (10 times), the initial value of the remaining number of times notified in the first fluctuation display (first rotation fluctuation display) is "9", and the final fluctuation display (10th rotation) is "9". The final value of the remaining number of times reported in the variable display of ) is "0". The update timing of the remaining number of times is set at the start of each variable display.

Here, when the effect mode currently being executed is a special mode, the game state in this special mode is either the normal game state or the hidden game state, and the electric chew support function is available in either game state. Since it is not activated, it is difficult for the player to recognize the game state during the special mode, and the game state is hidden. At this time, in this embodiment, as described above, in the special mode, when the number of fluctuation display times reaches a predetermined number (10 times) without the occurrence of the next big hit, the game state in the special mode changes to the normal game state. If so, the next variable display is shifted to the normal mode, and if the game state in the special mode is the hidden game state, the special mode is continued even in the next variable display. Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the final variation display (10th variation display) of the predetermined number of variations (10 times), after the 10th variation display is completed, the normal mode (whether the current game state is the normal game state), or whether the special mode continues after the end of this tenth rotation of the variable display (the current game state is the latent certainty game state). or) is executed.

[Mode branch effect]
In the mode branch effect, in the 10th rotation of the variable display immediately after shifting to the special mode, depending on the display mode of the background image on the screen, whether the special mode continues even after the 10th rotation of the variable display is normally performed. It is a production that suggests whether it will fall into mode. The types of mode branch effects are broadly classified into a mode continuation effect suggesting that the special mode will continue after the 10th rotation, and a mode end effect suggesting that the special mode will end after the 10th rotation. be done. In this embodiment, the background image displayed in the special mode (special background image) and the background image displayed in the normal mode (normal background image) are basically substantially the same background image. . Specifically, the background image shown in FIG. 25 described above is displayed as the background image regardless of whether the rendering mode currently being executed is the special mode or the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 25, a logo icon 731, an ally icon 732, and ally icons 733 to 735 are displayed in the background image of the normal mode or special mode.

In this embodiment, as the display mode of the logo icon 731 of the background image, there are a normal display mode in which the display color of the logo icon 731 is "white" and a special display mode in which the display color of the logo icon 731 is "rainbow color". is set. Here, when the rendering mode currently being executed is the normal mode, the logo icon 731 is always displayed in the normal display mode (white). On the other hand, when the effect mode currently being executed is the special mode, the logo icon 731 is displayed in the normal display mode (white) in the variable display of the 1st to 9th rotation immediately after shifting to the special mode. On the other hand, in the variable display of the next tenth rotation, the display mode of the logo icon 731 differs depending on the type of mode branch effect. That is, when the special mode ends at the 10th rotation of the variable display, the display mode of the logo icon 731 is displayed in the normal display mode as a mode ending effect during the execution of the 10th rotation of the variable display. When the special mode ends and the normal mode is entered, the logo icon 731 maintains the normal display mode in the variable display in the normal mode. On the other hand, if the special mode continues even in the tenth and subsequent rotations, the display mode of the logo icon 731 is displayed in the special display mode as a mode continuation effect during the execution of the tenth rotation. When the special mode continues, the display mode of the logo icon 731 maintains the special display mode in the variable display after the 11th rotation. In this way, the mode branch effect continues even after the variable display in the special mode depending on whether the logo icon 731 is displayed in the normal display mode or in the special display mode in the tenth rotation of the variable display. or the possibility that the special mode ends with the variable display (falls back to the normal mode).

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, an example of the effect of the remaining number of times notification effect and the mode branch effect in this embodiment will be described. Here, in FIG. 60, when the game state in the special mode is the normal game state, the production progresses in the order of (1)→(2)→(3)→(4) in the figure, and the game in the special mode When the state is the latent guaranteed game state, the effect progresses in the order of (1)→(2)→(5)→(6) in the figure.

First, when the game state in the special mode is the normal game state, as shown in (1) in the figure, when the effect mode enters the special mode, "10 times" is displayed as the remaining number of times in the special mode on the screen. be done. Note that the logo icon 731 is displayed in the normal display mode (white) on the screen.

As indicated by (2) in the figure, when the variable display of the first rotation of the special mode is started, the remaining number of times of the special mode is decremented by one, and "9 times" is displayed as the remaining number of times. After that, each time the variable display is started, the remaining number of special mode display is decremented by one. Note that the logo icon 731 is still displayed in the normal display mode (white) on the screen.

As shown in (3) in the figure, when the variable display of the 10th rotation of the special mode (the variable display of the last of the predetermined number of times) is started, "0 times" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the special mode. , a mode end effect is performed in which the display mode of the logo icon 731 is displayed in the normal display mode. By performing this mode end effect, it is suggested or notified to the player that the next variable display will drop to the normal mode (that the current game state is the normal game state).

As shown in (4) in the figure, when the effect mode falls from the special mode to the normal mode, the remaining number display disappears from the screen, and the logo icon 731 is displayed in the normal display mode. Then, the normal mode continues until the next big hit occurs.

On the other hand, when the game state in the special mode is the latent game state, as shown in (5) in the figure, the variation display of the tenth rotation of the special mode (the variation display of the final time of the predetermined number of times) is started. Then, "0 times" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the special mode, and a mode continuation effect is performed in which the display mode of the logo icon 731 is displayed in a special display mode (rainbow color). By performing this mode continuation effect, it is suggested or notified to the player that the special mode will continue in the next and subsequent variable displays (that the current game state is the hidden game state).

As shown in (5) in the figure, when the 11th rotation of the special mode is started (when the special mode continues), the display of the remaining number of special modes disappears from the screen, and the logo icon 731 remains in the special display mode. is displayed. The special mode continues until the next big hit occurs.

[Standby demonstration]
Next, the standby demonstration effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a timing chart of the standby demonstration effect. In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal game state (low-probability low-base state), when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, a standby demonstration effect ( customer waiting demonstration) is executed. The predetermined conditions are (1) that the production mode is the normal mode, and (2) that the game has been interrupted for a predetermined period of time or longer. It should be noted that "the game is interrupted for a predetermined period of time or more" means, as described above, that the period in which the special symbol operation reserve ball does not exist continues for a predetermined period of time or longer, and that the special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner. It means that the period lasts longer than a predetermined period of time, that a game ball does not enter or pass through any of the winning holes lasts longer than a predetermined period of time, or that a period of time during which no game balls are fired lasts longer than a predetermined period of time. do. The termination condition of this standby demonstration effect is when the game interruption state is canceled (when the game is started or resumed), specifically, the game ball is sent to the first start port 51 or the second start port 52. When the ball enters, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, when the operation suspension ball of the special symbol is generated, when the rotation operation of the shooting handle 12 for shooting the game ball is detected. . On the other hand, when a game ball enters (passes through) the operation gate 53, when the variable display of the normal pattern is started, or when the operation suspension ball of the normal pattern is generated, the game ball goes to the general winning openings 61 to 64. The standby demonstration effect does not end when, for example, enters the ball. In addition, on the standby demo screen, a cross-shaped switch (cross key, cross button, etc., which is different from the effect button used in the button effect (operation request effect)), which is one of the effect buttons 15, is displayed. By operating it, the volume of the sound output from the gaming machine can be adjusted. In this case, even if an operation related to volume adjustment is performed, the standby demo screen will not end, and it is possible to display two screens at the same time. It may be displayed, that is, the relationship of display priority may be "volume adjustment screen>standby demonstration screen". Also, the volume may be adjusted even when the standby demo screen is not displayed, for example, during the variable display or during the execution of the special game.

In this embodiment, as described above, when the main control board 100 determines that the game has been interrupted for a predetermined period of time or more, it transmits a standby demo command, and the production control board 200 transmits this customer waiting demo command. Although it has been configured to start the standby demonstration effect triggered by the reception, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. It may be configured such that the standby demonstration effect is started by determining that the fluctuation start command from is not received for a predetermined time or more.

In the present embodiment, the normal mode and the special mode are set as the production mode in the normal game state (low probability low base state), but even if the current game state is the normal game state, the current production When the mode is the special mode, the standby demonstration effect is not performed even if the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or longer. The reason for this is that when the current production mode is a special mode (the game state is a normal game state, a latent game state, or a hidden state), the game has been interrupted for a predetermined time or more. This is because, when the standby demonstration effect is started as a trigger, the player will know that the current game state is the normal game state by the occurrence of the standby demonstration effect. That is, after the transition to the special mode, the player intentionally interrupts the game, and the current game state can be grasped by whether or not the standby demonstration effect is started after the lapse of the predetermined time. This is because the game can be continued in the guaranteed game state, and the game can be terminated in the normal game state. Therefore, when the production mode in the normal game state is the normal mode, the standby demonstration production is executed when the game interruption state continues for a predetermined time or more, while the production mode in the normal game state is the special mode. In some cases, there is a special mode in which the game progresses while the current game state is concealed by not executing the standby demonstration effect (by ignoring the standby demo command) even if the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or longer. It is possible to fully secure the playability of the game.

<Processing on the main control board side>
Next, the procedure of operation processing in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 62 to 75. FIG. The processing on the main control board 100 side includes main control side main processing and main control side timer interrupt processing.

《Main processing on the main control side》
62 and 63 are flow charts showing the main control side main processing of the main control board 100. FIG. In this main control side main process, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by resetting when the power is turned on, the program starts and the processes after S1 are started.

First, as an initial setting required when power is turned on, the top address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S1), and access to the RAM 103 is permitted (S2). Subsequently, a vector table storing the start address of the program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in the built-in register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). If the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is zero-cleared in S9, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag is read to determine whether or not the power-off normal information is saved (S6).

Here, if the power-off normal information is stored (S6: YES), a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). The power-on checksum calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off processing described later. Sum becomes "0". In this manner, it is determined at power-on whether the information stored in the RAM 103 before power-off is correctly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12, which will be described later, in order to return to the state before the power was turned off. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, the initialization data at power-on is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 70, initialize the effect lamp LP, etc., a request is made for an effect control command ("effect initial command") to the effect control board 200 (S11).

Next, in the power-off recovery setting process, the power-on normal information setting, the initial setting of various errors, and the communication initial setting with the payout control board 400 are performed in order in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power was turned on correctly, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, and the power-off occurrence information is initialized. Turn off the power off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are set, and data corresponding to the number of transfer bytes are transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of power failure is read, and the power failure recovery process relating to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

Subsequently, a transmission request is made for an effect control command ("power-off recovery command") when power is restored between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 (S15). This power-off recovery command includes information on inspection of the communication line, operating state of special symbols, probability variation count, time saving count, ball easy state count, variation pattern selection state, and error state. Command requests that have not been sent before the power is turned off are cleared. Next, in the pattern storage number command request process, the information on the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the time of power off is read, and the effect control command including the information on the number of operation pending balls is requested ( S16).

Subsequently, a return setting is performed to return the normal electric accessory 522 to the state before the power was turned off (for example, the second start port 52 is opened) (S17). Furthermore, the return setting for returning the special electric accessory 542 to the state before power-off (for example, the state in which the big winning opening 54 is opened) is performed (S18). Subsequently, the value of the probability variation flag is read, and the operation state of the probability variation function of the special symbol at the time of power failure is set (S19). In addition, the probability variation flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game (flag indicating that the probability variation function of the special symbol is in operation). Next, in order to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and the timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S21). Then, in preparation for restarting the watchdog timer, clear word 1 ("55H") is set (S22).

Next, in order to determine whether a power failure has occurred, the value of the power failure confirmation flag is read to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred (S23). If power failure has not occurred, an initial value random number update process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the minimum value is returned to "0".

Next, interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of timer interrupt processing (S25), the above-described interrupt prohibition processing (S21) is returned to, and the loop processing of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed at predetermined intervals. Repeat the process up to If there is an interrupt request in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt processing is started when the interrupt is enabled in S25. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is ON in S23, that is, if power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26 to execute the power-off processing described below.

Next, as power-off processing (S26 to S32), clear word 2 ("AAH") is first set to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether or not the content of the power-off information flag is power-on normal data (S27). If it is the power-on normal information (S27: Yes), power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, if it is not power-on normal information (S27: No), power-off abnormal data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, the complement of the checksum data is calculated, and the resultant value of the complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, the access prohibition setting for the RAM 103 is performed (S32), and the processing is looped until the power is turned off.

《Main control side timer interrupt processing》
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 will be described. 64 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. FIG. This timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110 at regular intervals (for example, 4 ms), and is executed by interrupting the main control side main process described above.

First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operating conditions are set (S51).

Next, clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set to restart the watchdog timer (S52). At this time, the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted by sequentially writing clear word 1 and clear word 2 to the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within a preset timeout period. That is, when the main CPU 101 is executing the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before timeout. On the other hand, if the watchdog timer times out, a user reset will occur.

Next, input processing is executed (S53). In this input process, as various switches connected to the main control board 100, information on switches other than the RAM clear switch is read. That is, the first start switch 511, the second start switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the large winning switch 541, the general winning switches 611 and 641, the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, the back set opening switch, the magnetic sensor , radio wave sensor, etc., determine their states, and store the detected information.

Next, various random number updating processes are executed (S54). In this random number update process, the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the special symbol variation pattern random number, and the special symbol variation additional pattern random number are updated. As for the normal pattern variation pattern random number, 1 is added to the numerical value of the random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value. On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation additional pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtraction result is less than 0, a predetermined value (eg, 50000) is added to the subtraction result.

Next, an initial value update type random number update process is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update process, the random number per normal symbol, the soft random number per special symbol and the random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the minimum value is returned to "0". Also, when the number of the counter reaches one cycle, the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

Next, an initial value random number update process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the minimum value is returned to "0".

Next, timer subtraction processing is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for game operation control of the pachinko game machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are decremented by each interrupt period (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (fluctuation time, fixed display time) related to the variable display and stop display by the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, and the like. A specified variable time is set in the special symbol game timer at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and is subtracted as the time elapses. It should be noted that, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when one of the special symbols is fluctuatingly displayed, if a small winning game with the other special symbol is executed, during execution of the small winning game, one The timing of the variable display of special symbols is interrupted.

Next, a second start port effective period setting process is executed (S58). In this second starting opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the second starting opening 51 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the second starting opening 51 are set as the determination result.

Next, a winning monitoring process is executed (S59). In this winning monitoring process, the detection information of the first starting opening switch 511, the second starting opening switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the big winning opening switch 541, and the general winning opening switches 611, 641 in the input process (S53). Based on this, the game ball is inspected for passing through the switches. As a result, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through each switch, information indicating that the game ball has passed through each switch is stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. , and requests transmission of an effect control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed through each switch. The details of the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a prize ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 to indicate the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of prize based on the detection result of the above winning monitoring process, and the payout control board 400 Received data from is monitored to check communication with the payout control board 400 .

Next, a normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 53, a random number relating to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as operation reservation ball information. , Updating the number of operation pending balls up to a maximum of 4, and storing random numbers related to normal symbol lottery.

Next, a normal symbol control process is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control process, a series of processes relating to the normal symbol display device 75 or the normal electric accessory 522 are performed, so that depending on the value of the normal symbol game status, normal symbol fluctuation process, normal symbol stop symbol display process , Normal electric accessories in operation processing, normal electric accessories operation end demonstration processing, etc. are executed. In addition, in the process during normal design fluctuation, the display pattern number data of the normal design is created (updated) in order to display the normal design in a variable display or a fixed display.

Next, normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring processing is executed (S63). In this normal symbol variation start monitoring process, the operation state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the condition for starting the variation of the normal symbol is satisfied, the number of normal symbol operation reserved balls is digested by one, and the normal symbol is processed. Judgment of suitability, judgment of pattern, judgment of variation pattern, setting of variation time, etc. are performed in order.

Next, a start port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this starting opening monitoring control process, the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 51 and the second starting opening 52 is monitored, and if there is a winning of the game ball, the number of reserved balls is updated, and the special symbol lottery is performed. Random number storage, pre-reading notice effect judgment, command request for the number of symbols stored, etc. are performed in order.

Next, a special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, according to the value of the special symbol game status, a special symbol variation start process (S420), a special symbol variation process (S430), which will be described in detail later. ), special symbol stop symbol display process (S440), and the like are executed.

Next, a special electric accessory control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big win" or "minor win", as operation processing related to the special electric role product 542, the operation start and end of operation of the special electric role product 542 are set, The opening time and number of openings of the winning opening 54 are updated, the probability variation function is set to start operation, the variation time reduction function is set to start operation, the variation pattern selection state is set, and the like are executed in order.

Next, a special winning opening effective period setting process is executed (S67). In this big winning opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the big winning opening 54 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the big winning opening 54 are set as a result of this determination.

Next, a special symbol variation start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process, when there is a first special symbol or a second special symbol operation reserved ball, the number of reserved balls is digested by one, a command request for the number of symbols to be stored, and a judgment of whether the special symbol is appropriate or not. , determination of special symbols, determination of probability variation function, determination of time reduction function, setting of operation pattern of special electric role, setting of demonstration production time, etc. are performed in order.

Next, an abnormality detection process is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal from the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor, the door/frame opening signal, etc. are inspected in order. , determines whether the gaming machine is in an error state. If it is in an error state, an effect control command ("error effect specifying command") including the error information is generated in order to request the effect control board 200 to display an error.

Next, an entering ball passing time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this ball passing time abnormality detection process, when the ON signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or longer, the ball passing time abnormality is set, and a production control command ("error Effect designation command"), and a security signal output request for output to an external terminal.

Next, a game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times the special electric accessory 542 operates continuously (regular number of rounds), the number of operation pending balls of normal symbols and special symbols, etc. is created. In addition, display data for displaying the error state information detected in the abnormality detection process on the state indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

Next, LED output processing is executed (S72). In this LED output process, the special symbol control process (S65), in order to display the special symbol and the normal symbol, the number of reserved balls, the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, the error display, etc. The display data created by the abnormality detection process (S69), the game state display process (S71), etc. are displayed on the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, the normal symbol display device 75, the special symbol suspension lamps 73 and 74, and the normal symbol suspension. It outputs to the lamp 76, the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100, etc., and also initializes the display on these various display devices.

Next, a firing control signal output process is executed (S73). In this firing control signal output process, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality is not detected, a firing permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 to allow the shooting of game balls. do. On the other hand, when an abnormality in communication with the payout control board 400 or a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a signal for prohibiting shooting is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit shooting of game balls.

Next, a solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, in order to operate each electric role product 542, the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special electric role product control process (S66) are obtained. Based on the control data, an excitation signal is output to each electric accessory solenoid 623, 643.

Next, an effect control command transmission process is executed (S75). In this effect control command transmission process, the effect control command specified by the pointer is read from among the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage means 180 in the above process, and this effect control command is read out. A control command is transmitted to the effect control board 200 .

Next, external information output processing is executed (S76). In this external information output process, through the external information terminal board 600, game information related to the gaming machine PM is output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer. The external information signals include, for example, a winning ball signal, a door frame opening signal, a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormality sensor detection (such as an abnormality in the ball passage time abnormality) signal, a jackpot signal, a signal during a run, There is a pattern confirmation signal and the like.

Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set to an interrupt enabled state (S77). As a result, the main-control-side timer interrupt processing is terminated, the main-control-side main processing is resumed, and the main-control-side main processing is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

If the main control board 100 detects power failure (supply voltage drop based on a predetermined threshold value) during main control side main processing or interrupt processing, it generates a non-maskable interrupt and turns on the power failure confirmation flag. do. Then, after returning to the original process, the aforementioned power failure process (S
26 to S32) are executed.

≪Winning monitoring process≫
Next, the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing details of the winning monitoring process (S59).

First, a first start opening switch input process is executed (S101). In the first starter switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first starter switch 511 has been input. When the detection signal from the first starting hole switch 511 is input, the first starting hole winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 51 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, it generates a first starting entry winning command and temporarily stores it in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511, the process proceeds to the next step.

Subsequently, a second starting opening switch input process is executed (S102). In the second starting port switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 has been input. When the detection signal from the second starting hole switch 521 is input, the second starting hole winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 52 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, it generates a second starting entry winning command and temporarily stores it in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521, the process proceeds to the next step.

Next, an operation gate switch input process is executed (S103). In the operation gate switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the operation gate switch 531 has been input. When the detection signal from the operating gate switch 531 is input, the operating gate winning data indicating that the game ball has passed through the operating gate 53 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and the operating gate winning data is stored. A command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the operation gate switch 531, the process proceeds directly to the next step.

Subsequently, a special winning opening switch input process is executed (S104). In the big winning slot switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the big winning slot switch 541 is input. When the detection signal from the big winning slot switch 541 is input, the big winning slot winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the big winning slot 54 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. , generates a special prize winning command and temporarily stores it in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the big winning opening switch 541, the process proceeds to the next step.

Subsequently, a general winning opening switch process is executed (S105). In the general winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from the general winning opening switches 611 and 641 have been input. When the detection signals from the general winning slot switches 611 and 641 are input, the general winning slot winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the general winning slots 61 to 64 is stored in the winning data storage area of the main information storage means 180. In addition to temporary storage, a general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the general winning port switches 611 and 641, the current winning monitoring process is terminated.

≪Special symbol game processing≫
Next, a series of processing related to the special symbol game in the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. The processing related to the special symbol game includes the above-described start port monitoring control processing (S64), special symbol control processing (S65), special electric accessory control processing (S66), special symbol variation start monitoring control processing (S68), and the like. is applicable.

(Starting gate monitoring control process)
First, the starting port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the details of the starting port monitoring control process (S64).

First, it is determined whether or not winning of the game to the first starting port 51 is detected (S201). When the winning to the first starting port 51 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S202).

When the number of balls with the operation pending of the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), the random number per special symbol, the random number per special symbol, the special symbol as the lottery random number relating to the first special symbol game. A variation pattern random number value and a special symbol variation additional pattern random number value are acquired, and each random number value is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area (reservation n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the winning order (S203). ). Then, as an update of the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol, 1 is added to the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter (S204), and the winning check of the first start port 51 is completed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not winning of the game to the second starting port 52 has been detected (S205). When the winning to the second starting port 52 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S206). When the number of balls to be held in operation of the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), the random number per special symbol, the random number per special symbol, the special symbol as the lottery random number relating to the second special symbol game. A variation pattern random number value and a special symbol variation additional pattern random number value are acquired, and each random number value is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area (reservation n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 in accordance with the order of entry (S207). ). Then, as an update of the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol, 1 is added to the value of the second special symbol pending ball number counter (S208), and the winning check of the second starting port 52 is finished.

Subsequently, whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, that is, whether the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been added in S204 or S208. (S209). If there is an update of the number of pending balls in operation (S209: YES), a symbol memory number command including information on the number of pending balls in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and stored in the main information storage means. 180 is stored in the command storage area (S210).

Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is the advance determination timing (S211). If it is the pre-determining timing (S211: YES), in order to generate pre-reading determination information based on various random numbers acquired at the time of the start-up winning, a special symbol hit random from the hit random number buffer (holding n storage area or register) Numerical values are read out, and preliminary judgment is made (S212). Then, the pre-judgment command including the information of the pre-judgment result (pre-judgment number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S213).

Also, a special per-symbol random number value is read from the per-symbol random number buffer, and symbol prior determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (symbol pre-determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S215). Further, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer, and the variation pattern pre-determination is performed (S216). Then, a variation pattern pre-determination command including the information of this pre-determination result (variation pattern pre-determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S217).

(Special symbol variation start monitoring control process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68).

In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68), the later-described special symbol variation start monitoring process is performed for the special symbol side that satisfies the variation start condition among the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (S310) is executed. In addition, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the fluctuation start condition, the process on the second special symbol side is preferentially executed as described above.

First, it is determined whether it is during a big hit or a small hit (S301). Subsequently, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, that is, whether the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both "00H (in fluctuation standby)" It is determined whether or not (S302).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls in operation of the second special symbol is "0" (S303), and if the number of pending balls is not "0" (S303: NO), the second special Considering that the symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied, after setting the address of the second special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table (the addresses of various tables used in subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) (S304) , the second special symbol side special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310). That is, in the present embodiment, if there is an operation-reserving ball with the second special symbol, the operation-reserving ball with the second special symbol is given priority regardless of the presence or absence of the operation-reserving ball with the first special symbol. ready to be digested. The details of this special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is "0" (S303: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is "0" (S305). . Here, if the number of pending balls is not "0" (S305: NO), it is considered that the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table (hereinafter After setting the addresses of various tables and the address of the RAM storage area used in the process (S306), the process proceeds to the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S310) on the side of the first special symbol.

When the fluctuation start conditions for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not met (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) is skipped. .

(Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309).

In this special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309), the first special symbol variation start monitoring table or the second special symbol variation start monitoring table set in the above S304 or S308 is referred to, and the current variation start is determined. The target special symbol side processing will be executed, but since the method of processing is common between the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except for special cases, the first special symbol side It will be explained collectively without distinguishing whether it is a process or a process on the second special symbol side.

First, 1 is subtracted from the number of operation pending balls on the side of the special symbol that is the object of this fluctuation start (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of activated balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S312). Next, access the special symbol reserved storage area on the side of the special symbol that is the target of this fluctuation start, and the special symbol per random number stored in the first reserved storage area (reserved 1 storage area), special symbol per The symbol random number, the special symbol variation pattern random number, and the special symbol variation additional pattern random number are read out in order, and these random numbers are used for special symbol validity determination processing (S320), symbol determination processing (S330), and variation pattern selection processing, which will be described later. For use in (S423), transfer to the special symbol validity determination area, special symbol symbol determination area, special symbol variation pattern determination area, and special symbol variation additional pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S313). Further, to update the reservation storage area, the reservation ball information stored in the reservation 2 storage area to the reservation 4 storage area is shifted to the lower reservation storage area, and the reservation 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

Subsequently, a special symbol suitability determination process is executed (S320). Special symbol suitability determination process (S3
In 20), first, a special symbol lottery table is acquired. At this time, when the game state is a special pattern probability variable state, a high probability win-fail lottery table is acquired, and when the game state is a normal state, a low probability win-fail lottery table is acquired. Next, the random number per special symbol is read out from the special symbol suitability determination area of the main information storage means 180 . Then, with reference to the special symbol success/fail lottery table, the special symbol success/failure determination is executed based on the special symbol per random number value. Also, a value (big win data “55H”, small win data “33H”, loss data “00H”) corresponding to the win/loss determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 .

Subsequently, a symbol determination process is executed (S330). In the design determination process (S330), the stop design of the special design and the character effect number (fluctuation addition design information) are determined according to the result of the success/failure determination. Then, the stop symbol (symbol group) of the special symbols determined this time and the character effect number are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage means 180.例文帳に追加In addition, the character production number is the type of the determined stop pattern (design group) and the operating state of the probability variation function of the special design and the normal design (special design probability ON / special design probability OFF / normal design probability / It is determined based on the combination with 4 patterns of probability variation off of normal pattern). Incidentally, if the result of the hit/fail determination is no, the character effect number "0" is determined.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol corresponds to a big hit (S342). If the result of the special symbol suitability determination is a loss (S342: NO), the process proceeds to S351.

If the result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is a big win (S342: YES), after the big win game is completed based on the type of symbol group (big win type) determined in S330 and the game state at the time of winning the big win. The probability variation frequency is determined as the number of times the special symbol probability variation function operates (S345). Further, based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in S330 and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of fluctuation time shortening times is calculated as the number of times the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function operates after the jackpot game ends. is determined (S346). Furthermore, based on the type of pattern group (jackpot type) determined in S330 and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of times of electric support is determined as the number of times the electric chewing support function operates after the jackpot game ends ( S347). The determination result (probability variation frequency, variation time reduction frequency, power support frequency) is stored in the time saving frequency storage area and the power support frequency storage area of the main information storage means 180 . Subsequently, based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in S330, the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542 during the jackpot game (round game) is set (S348). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, the opening pattern (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in each round, and the like are set.

Next, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330 and the current game state, the variation pattern selection state after the end of the big win game or after the small win game is set (S349). Subsequently, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330, the demonstration performance time (hit start demo time and hit end demo time) of the special game (big win game or small win game) is set (S350). Next, the special symbol validity determination area and the special symbol determination area of the main information storage means 180 used in the special symbol validity determination process (S320) and the symbol determination process (S330) are cleared (S351). Then, the special symbol game status of the special symbol side to be changed this time is changed from "00H (waiting)" to "01H (variation start)" (S352).

(Special symbol control processing)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing details of the special symbol control process (S65).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric role product 542 is not in operation, that is, whether or not the special electric role product game status is "00H (hit waiting state)" (S401). Subsequently, when the special electric accessory 542 is not in operation (S401: YES), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol game status is "00H (waiting)" (S402).

If the second special symbol game status is not "00H (waiting)" (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in subsequent processes Addresses of various tables and addresses of RAM storage areas) are set (S403), and the process proceeds to special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is "00H (standby)" (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (in subsequent processes Addresses of various tables to be used and addresses of RAM storage areas) are set (S404), and the process proceeds to special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410).

In addition, in the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) described below, using the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above S403 or S404, special The processing on the symbol side will be executed, but since the method of processing is common between the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except for special cases, is it the processing on the first special symbol side? , It will be explained collectively without distinguishing whether it is the processing on the second special symbol side. The details of this special symbol control general-purpose process (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol control general processing)
Subsequently, a special symbol control general-purpose process is executed (S404, S407). Here, FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407).

In this special symbol control general-purpose process (S404, S407), a branch process (S411 to S414) is executed for shifting to a process corresponding to the value of the special symbol game status ("01H", "02H", "03H"). do. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status of the special symbol side to be subject to this change is not 0 (S411). If the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "01H (variation start)" (S412). When the special symbol game status is "01H" (S412: YES), the process proceeds to special symbol variation start processing (S420). The details of this special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the case of NO in S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "02H (fluctuating)" (S413). When the special symbol game status is "02H" (S413: YES), the process proceeds to special symbol fluctuation process (S430). The details of this special symbol fluctuation process (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the case of NO in S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (stop symbol display)" (S414). When the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process proceeds to special symbol stop symbol display process (S440). The details of this special symbol stop symbol display process (S440) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol variation start process)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process (S420).

First, the main variation pattern table is acquired based on the results of the determination of whether or not the special symbols are appropriate and the selection state of the variation pattern (S421). Subsequently, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read out from the special symbol variation pattern determination area, and one of the main variation patterns is selected by referring to the main variation pattern table (S422).

Next, based on the main variation pattern selected in S422, a main variation addition table is obtained (S423). Subsequently, a special symbol variation addition pattern random number value is read out from the special symbol variation addition pattern determination area, and one of the main variation addition patterns is selected by referring to the main variation addition table (S424).

Subsequently, a variation time (basic variation time + variation addition time) corresponding to the main variation pattern and main variation addition pattern selected this time is set (S425). Then, as a setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbols, the fluctuation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S426), and a variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S427). As the variation start command, a communication inspection command, a variation additional pattern information designation command, a variation pattern designation command, and a design designation command are sequentially generated in order to start the design variation performance in the performance display device 70, and stored in the main information storage means. 180 command storage area.

Subsequently, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used for determining the variation pattern are cleared (S428). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "01H (fluctuation start)" to "02H (fluctuation)" (S429).

(Processing during special symbol fluctuation)
Next, the process during special symbol fluctuation (S430) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol changing process (S430).

First, in order to perform variable display of special symbols, a special symbol display pattern number switching process is executed (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), the display pattern number data of the special symbol is generated every predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) in order to display the special symbols in a variable or fixed manner.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has become "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time has ended (S432). When the special symbol fluctuation time has ended (S432: YES), the stop symbol of the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 is set (S433). Subsequently, a variation stop command is generated for instructing the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbols, and this command is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S434).

Next, "500 (ms)" is stored in the special symbol game timer as the fixed display time (S435). It should be noted that the "determined display time" is the time during which the stop symbol is definitely stopped and displayed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "02H (fluctuation)" to "03H (stop symbol display)" (S436).

(Special symbol stop symbol display process)
Next, the processing during special symbol stop symbol display (S440) will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol stop symbol display process (S440).

First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the fixed display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has ended (S441). Here, when the fixed display time of the special symbol is over (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (displaying the stopped symbol)" to "00H (waiting)" (S442).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is the big hit data "55H" (S443). If the success/failure determination data is big hit data (S443: YES), stop the operation of the special symbol probability variation function (S444), stop the operation of the special symbol variation time reduction function (S445), and operate the electric chew support function. stop (S446), and so on. Specifically, the variable probability flag is set to "00H (OFF)", and the probability variation counter, the variation time reduction counter, and the easy-to-ball state counter are set to "00H" and cleared to zero.

Next, as a special game start demonstration setting process, the start demonstration display time is set, and an effect control command (jackpot start demo command) for instructing the start of the start demo effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of executions of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state count counter) is cleared to zero (S448). Also, the special electric role product game status is changed from "00H (hit waiting state)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, "00H" is set to clear the content of the success/failure determination flag (S450).

On the other hand, when the success/failure determination data is not the big hit data (S443: NO), it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (S451). If the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (S451: YES), 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number counter of the main information storage means 180 as the number of variations of the special symbol this time (step S452). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability variation counter is zero (step S453). When the probability variation counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the special symbol probability variation function is stopped (S454). If the probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), skip S454 and proceed to S455.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (S455). When the special symbol variation time shortening function is in operation (S455: YES), 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number counter of the main information storage means 180 as the number of variations of the special symbol this time (step S456). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction number counter is zero (step S457). When the variable time reduction frequency counter is zero (S457: YES), the operation of the special symbol variable time reduction function is stopped (S458), assuming that the number of times the special symbol time saving state has ended has been reached. If the post-subtraction fluctuation time reduction counter is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

Next, it is determined whether or not the electric chewing support function is in operation (S459). When the electric chewing support function is in operation (S459: YES), 1 is subtracted from the electric support number counter of the main information storage means 180 as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol of this time (step S460). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the electric support number counter is zero (step S461). When the electric support number counter is zero (S461: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped (S462), assuming that the number of ending times of the easy-ball-entering state has been reached. When the electric support number counter after the subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S463.

Next, 1 is subtracted from the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage means 180 (S463). Then, the variation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, referring to the variation pattern selection state count counter of the main information storage means 180, it is determined whether the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached the preset end count, and the end count If it has reached, it switches to the next specified variation pattern selection state. On the other hand, if the end count has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

Then, to generate a production control command (game state designation command) containing the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information updated in the above S451~S464, the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S465). Incidentally, on the side of the effect control board 200, setting and updating of the effect mode are executed based on the information of this game state designation command.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
Next, the special electric accessary product control process (S66) will be described. 74 and 75 are flowcharts showing the details of the electric accessory control process (S66).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric role product game status is "01H (special game)" (S501). When the special electric role product game status is "01H" (S501: YES), the special game process is executed in subsequent processes. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is in operation (S502). If the special electric role product 542 is not operating (S502: NO), it is determined whether or not it is time to start the operation of the special electric role product 542 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric role product 542 is the timing of starting the operation of the special electric role product 542 in each round game.

When it is time to start the operation of the special electric accessory 542 (S503: YES), an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and this command is stored in the main information storage means 180. store in the area (S504). On the side of the effect control board 200, based on the information of this round effect designation command (information such as the current number of rounds), a round effect corresponding to each round game during the special game is executed. Then, the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started (S505), and the processing of S506 to S510 is executed as the processing during the operation of the special electric accessory 542.

As a process during the operation of the special electric role product 542, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning hole 54 by a prescribed count number (maximum number of winning prizes) (S506), and the operation time of the special electric role product 542 It is determined whether or not the (opening time) has elapsed (S507). At this time, when the game balls enter the big winning hole 54 by a prescribed count number (maximum winning number) (S506: YES) or when the operation time of the special electric accessory 542 has passed (S507: YES), a special The operation of the electric accessory 542 is stopped (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 has reached a predetermined number of rounds (S509). If the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S509: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 is incremented by one (S510).

On the other hand, when the number of times of continuous operation of the special electric accessory 542 has reached the specified number of rounds (S509: YES), the process proceeds to S511, and the end demonstration display time is set as special game hit end demonstration setting processing. At the same time, an effect control command (jackpot end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demonstration effect is generated (S511).

Subsequently, the variation time reduction frequency information set in S346 is stored in the variation time reduction frequency counter (S512). In addition, the information on the number of times of power support set in S347 is stored in the power support number counter (S513).

Subsequently, referring to the content of the probability variation determination flag set in S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the conditional device is an operation based on a specific symbol (so-called probability variation symbol) (S514). If the condition device is operated by a specific symbol (S514: YES), the probability variation frequency (activation time data) set in S345 is stored in the probability variation frequency counter of the main information storage means 180, and the special symbol is stored. start the operation of the probability variation function (S515). On the other hand, if the condition device is not activated by the specific symbol (S514: NO), the non-activated data "00H" is stored in the probability variation number counter, and S515 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the variable time reduction frequency information stored in the time reduction frequency counter is variable time reduction function activation data (data other than "00H") (S516). When it is the variable time shortening function operation data (S516: YES), the operation of the special symbol variable time shortening function is started (S517). On the other hand, if it is not the variable time reduction function actuation data (S516: NO), S517 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the electric support number information stored in the electric support number counter is electric chew support function activation data (data other than "00H") (S518). If it is the electric chewing support function activation data (S518: YES), the electric chewing support function is started to operate (S519-S521). That is, the operation start of the normal symbol probability variation function (S519), the operation start of the normal symbol variation time reduction function (S520), and the operation start of the normal electric accessory 522 open extension function (S521) are executed in this order. On the other hand, if it is not electric chewing support function activation data, S519 to S521 are skipped.

Next, it switches to the variation pattern selection state determined in S347 (S522). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game set in S512 to S522 described above and the variation pattern selection state information is generated, and stored in the main information storage means 180. Store in the command storage area (S523). On the side of the effect control board 200, the effect mode after the special game is set based on the information of this game state designation command. Then, the special electric role product game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (hit waiting state)" (S524).

<Processing on the production control board side>
Next, the procedure of operation processing in the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 76 to 81. FIG. The processing on the production control board 200 side includes reset start processing (including production control side main processing) that is executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset, such as after turning on the power, and production control side timer interrupt that is started at regular intervals. Processing, reception interrupt processing of the effect control command started due to the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and the lamp started with the arrival of the predetermined generation time specified in the time schedule of the variable effect pattern It includes an effect interrupt process and an image control command transmission interrupt process that is activated at regular intervals.

Each interrupt process (exception process) is set with a priority level indicating the priority when multiple interrupt processes occur. In this example, "reset start processing by power reset: top priority", "reset start processing by various abnormalities: top priority" → "effect control command reception interrupt processing: level 7" → "WDT (runaway detection) The priority levels are ranked in the order of reset start process: level 3"→"image control command transmission interrupt process: level 2"→"effect control side timer interrupt process: level 1". It should be noted that the "reset start processing due to various abnormalities" is, for example, when the sub-main CPU 201 executes an illegal command, when the sub-main CPU 201 attempts to access an illegal area or an illegal method, DMA (Direct Memory Access) Starts when an error occurs during transfer. In the present embodiment, the multiple types of interrupt processing described above are exemplified, but actually there are other types of interrupt processing.

In the effect control side main process, basically, the process proceeds after setting to either a state of prohibition of all interrupts or prohibition of interrupts other than the effect control command reception interrupt. On top of that, when the effect control side main process is in an interrupt permitted state, each interrupt process is started in such a manner as to interrupt the main process. In each interrupt process, when there is a request for another interrupt process (multiple interrupts occur) while the interrupt process is being executed, in principle, if the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed, While the interrupt request is permitted during execution, the interrupt request is prohibited if the interrupt process has a lower priority level than the interrupt process being executed or has the same priority level. That is, each interrupt process proceeds while other interrupts of the same or lower priority level are prohibited. Then, from each interrupt process to the effect control side main process, it returns in a state where all interrupts are permitted. In addition, the priority (priority level) of such an interrupt factor is prescribed|regulated by the register setting of the production|presentation control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<Reset start processing>
First, reset start processing of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing reset start processing of the effect control board 200. FIG. This reset start process is started by any of reset when power is turned on, reset caused by various abnormalities, and reset caused by WDT (runaway detection), and after security check of the sub-main CPU 201 , the program is started, and the processing after S601 is started.

First, as an initial setting required when power is turned on, the top address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S601). All interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

Subsequently, as basic hardware settings, an initial value is set in an internal register provided in the sub-main CPU 201, and the I/O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Furthermore, the memory area in RAM203 of production control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, variables with initial values are set to initial values, and variables without initial values are initialized by 0 clearing. Also, the sub-main CPU 201 develops the control program stored in the ROM 202 in the RAM 203 as appropriate.

Subsequently, interruptions other than reception interruption processing of the effect control command are prohibited (S605). Next, a process of setting the type of error that should be valid for the model among the various errors set in advance common to each model is performed (S606). Further, a light-off request is made in order to put all the effect lamps LP (the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 80) into the light-off state (S607). Then, a watchdog timer is activated to monitor runaway of the sub-main CPU 201 (S608).

Subsequently, an effect control side main process is executed as a main process of the game effect (S609). Details of this effect control side main process (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. It should be noted that, when the transition to the effect control side main processing in the S609, it is usually impossible to return from the main processing to the reset start processing, but if by any chance returns to this processing due to the occurrence of a program bug or the like , it transitions to a low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which power consumption is reduced compared to normal operation.

《Production control side main processing》
Next, the effect control side main process (S609) of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the effect control side main process (S609).

First, an address (head address where the program is developed) for starting a check as to whether or not the control program is correctly developed in the RAM 203 is obtained in the effect control side main processing (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (activation of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

Then, the device initialization operation is performed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the power of the pachinko game machine PM is turned on (at the start of resetting). It is executed for the purpose of confirming the location information required for Incidentally, at the end of the initialization operation, the movable accessory 24 returns to a preset initial position (reference position).

Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared to restart it (S614). At this time, when the sub-main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, a predetermined clear word is written in the WDT clear register of the sub-main CPU 201 within a preset time-out period, thereby starting the watchdog timer. Cleared and restarted. On the other hand, if the watchdog timer times out, a user reset will occur.

Subsequently, input port check processing is executed (S615). In this input port check process, the reading of the I/O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input/output process S912 in the timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is monitored each time an interrupt occurs, and monitoring is performed multiple times (for example, four times). If the input port states are all "1", the signal level is "1 (H level)"; if all are "0", the signal level is "0 (L level)"; otherwise, the signal level is Do not change (this establishes the input signal).

Subsequently, an error effect management process is executed (S616). In this error effect management process, error effects by various devices are started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S622). Furthermore, in the error effect management process, an initial value (error effect time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error effect. This error management timer is subtracted and updated in a cycle of 16ms in the error management timer update process (S920) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. Then, when the error management timer times out, the error presentation is ended.

Subsequently, effect button monitoring control processing is executed (S617). In this effect button monitoring control process, when the button announcement effect is incorporated during the fluctuation fluctuation of the pattern, the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored within a predetermined operation valid time, and information on the input state of the effect button 15 is obtained. hold.

Subsequently, a notice lottery management process is executed (S618). In this advance notice lottery management process, a notice effect pattern that defines the content of the notice effect that occurs at each stage of the variation process of the decorative symbols is selected in accordance with the scenario of the change effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). Determined by lottery. The notice effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 . Also, an image control command for designating this notice effect pattern number to the image control board 300 side is generated and set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 . At this time, when the character object announcement effect pattern is selected as the announcement effect pattern, a character object request is generated, and the driving pattern of the movable object 24 is specified in the subsequent device management processing (S619). . In addition, in this example, all of the multiple types of notice effects (prediction effect patterns) that occur within one variation of the decorative pattern are not drawn in one main loop process, but the main loop processing efficiency is improved. In order to do so, it is configured to draw lots across a plurality of main loop processes, divided for each occurrence time of the notice effect (for example, fluctuation start stage, ready-to-win occurrence stage, fluctuation stop stage). At that time, for the notice effect that occurs at the start stage of the decorative pattern fluctuation, it is necessary to synchronize with the start of the decorative pattern fluctuation (immediately transmit the image control command). It is supposed to be done.

Next, device management processing is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there is an operation request (lamp request, accessory request) for various devices in the command analysis process (S620) described later, multiple types of pattern data (lamp pattern, driving pattern) stored in the ROM 203 ), the pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, role announcement effect number) is specified, and control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, lamp data associated with each frame time (time required to update an image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In this example, one frame time corresponds to the time required for drawing processing of one frame when the effect display device 70 draws at approximately 60 frames per second (=approximately 60 fps). Similarly, in the driving pattern data of the movable accessory 24, driving data associated with each interrupt period (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals in the effect control side timer interrupt processing described later, and the target device starts operating. On the other hand, in the effect control side timer interrupt processing described later, when the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is all completed, the effect lamp LP is extinguished, or the operation of the movable accessory 24 is stopped. , to end control of the target device.

Subsequently, command analysis processing (S620) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the effect control command is stored, the command is read, and the read effect control command is read. To execute the effect control processing corresponding to the type of. Details of this command analysis processing (S620) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, during the current loop processing, it is determined whether or not command analysis (analysis of the effect control command) has been executed (S621). If the command has just been analyzed (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 and proceeds to the next loop process. On the other hand, if command analysis is not executed (S621: NO), that is, if the command buffer is empty, effect lottery random number update processing is executed until a predetermined time elapses (S622). In this embodiment, the predetermined time is set to "16 ms", which is half the minimum unit (32 ms) of the lamp LP switching control. In this effect lottery random number update process, various effect lottery random numbers such as a look-ahead notice lottery random number, a decoration pattern random number, a variable effect pattern random number, and a notice effect pattern random number are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis processing (S622) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the details of the command analysis process (S622). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the effect corresponding to the type of the stored effect control command is monitored. Execute control processing.

First, it is determined whether or not a game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S631). If the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to effect state transition processing (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), the process of transitioning the effect mode is executed based on the game state information and the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

Next, it is determined whether or not a hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S633). Here, the hold-related commands include a pattern storage number command and a pre-determination command. If this hold-related command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to hold information management processing (S634). In this pending information management process (S634), the pattern memory number command or the preliminary determination command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, and the pre-reading determination is executed based on the information of the preliminary determination result. A process for updating the display number and the display mode (display color, etc.) of the pending images displayed on the display unit 710 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not a symbol variation-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol variation related commands include a variation start command and a variation stop command. When the symbol variation-related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to the variation performance content determination process (S636). In this variation performance content determination process (S636), when the received symbol variation related command is a variation start command, a process for starting the variation performance of the decorative symbols is executed, and the received symbol variation related command stops varying. If it is a command, a process for terminating the variable performance of decorative symbols is executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a command related to the big hit effect is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the big-win effect-related commands include a big-win start demonstration effect command, a round effect specification command, and a big-win end demonstration effect command. When the big hit effect related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to the big hit effect content determination process (S638). In this jackpot effect content determination process (S638), a process for executing a start demonstration effect, a round effect, and an end demo effect is performed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a command related to a small hit effect is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S639). Here, the small-hit production related commands include a small-hit start demonstration production command and a small-hit end demonstration production command. When the small hit production related command is stored (step S639: YES), the process proceeds to the small hit production content determination process (S640). In this small-hit performance content determination process (S640), processing for executing a small-hit start demonstration performance and a small-hit end demonstration performance is performed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not an error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S641). If this error effect designation command is stored (S641: YES), the process proceeds to error effect content determination processing (S642). In this error effect content determination process (S642), an error effect designation command is read from the sub-information storage means 280, and an error effect pattern for notifying an error state by lighting of the effect lamp LP, sound of the speaker 11, or the like is determined. .

In addition, when the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO), nothing is done. command analysis processing is terminated.

<<Interrupt processing for receiving production control commands>>
Next, reception interruption processing of the production control command will be described. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing reception interrupt processing of the effect control command. In this effect control command reception interrupt process, as described above, an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt process. It's like The effect control command is configured to include 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the MODE data will also be referred to as the "first command", and the EVENT data will also be referred to as the "second command".

First, when an interrupt occurs based on the strobe signal from the main control board 100, it is determined whether or not the input value of the effect control command has been determined (S901). Specifically, the command data is read up to five times, and the input value is determined when the same value is read twice in succession. This is because there is a possibility that the reading of the effect control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not determined until the same value is read twice in succession.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). If the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, the effect lottery random number is obtained from the effect lottery random number generating means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S904). In addition, the timing of obtaining the effect lottery random number is set at the time of receiving the effect control command, because the effect control command is sent at physically irregular timing such as when the game ball starts winning a prize or when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. Therefore, by using this as a trigger, it is possible to prevent periodicity from appearing in the acquisition timing. By making the acquisition timing of the effect lottery random numbers irregular in this way, inconveniences such as unnaturally repeated selection of the same effect are less likely to occur even in various kinds of effect lotteries.

On the other hand, if the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether or not the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control commands are received in the order of the first command (MODE) and the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether or not there is a contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of effect control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (pointer for writing) is obtained (S906). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub-main information storage means 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S907). The stored command data is read in the command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of the effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909). Then, the production control command reception interrupt processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the original processing before the interruption.

《Production control side timer interrupt processing》
Next, the effect control side timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the effect control side timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse at regular time intervals, and is executed in the form of interrupting the above-described effect control side main process.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the sub-main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and then the processes after S911 are sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher, such as effect control command reception interrupts from the main control board 100 and watchdog timer interrupts, are permitted (S911).

Subsequently, port input/output processing is executed (S912). In this port input/output processing, input processing and output processing of port data in the I/O port circuit 204 are performed. In the input process, various signals input to the I/O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 are read out and output from the I/O port circuit 204 (output port).

Subsequently, device control data output processing is executed (S913). In this device control data output process, drive data for a predetermined period of time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. FIG. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt period. When the drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I/O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output process, the drive data is switched at each interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

Next, a production timer update process is executed (S914). In this production timer update process, the values of various production timers used for production operation control are subtracted and updated by an interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). The production timer includes a timer for managing the fluctuation time of the decorative pattern, a timer for managing the timing of occurrence of the advance notice production, and the like. This performance timer manages the time schedule in the variable performance pattern, and time management such as the driving timing of the movable accessory 24 and the lighting timing of the performance lamp LP is performed on the time axis. Incidentally, the effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S913) and the lamp data update process (S917) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

Subsequently, button control timer update processing is executed (S915). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the operation effective time of the effect button 15 is subtracted and updated for each interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). It should be noted that the valid operation time is the time during which the operation input of the production button 15 is valid.

Subsequently, task control counter update processing is executed (S916). In this task control counter update process, the task counter value (“0” to “15”) is updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is "0" to "14", it is incremented by 1, and if the value of the task counter becomes "15", it is returned to "0". That is, this task counter can have a cycle period of 16ms. Various tasks (task processing) are assigned according to the value of the task counter updated this time. Each process such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring process in S9189) and an error management task (error management timer update process in S919) is executed. In this example, one of the task counter values (“0” to “15”) is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values separated by 8 ms from each other) are used for runaway monitoring. task, and another value is assigned to the error management task (description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the cycle cycle of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to match the minimum unit (16 ms) of switching control of the effect lamp LP. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, realizing synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect.

Subsequently, lamp data update processing is executed (S917). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined time is read out from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S621) or the like and set. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamp LP. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. This lamp data output processing is configured as serial communication interrupt processing, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the lamp data in the transmission buffer in 1-byte units, and outputs the data to the lamp connection board 91 bit by bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, whereby all lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every one frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and this lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer.

Subsequently, image CPU runaway monitoring processing is executed (S918). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and if the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control board 300 It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 is running out of control, and a reset signal is transmitted from the performance control board 200 to the image control board 300. - 特許庁As a result, the image control board 300 executes a predetermined reset process when the sub-sub CPU 301 is reset. Note that the toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which H level/L level are alternately repeated every frame time.

Next, error management timer processing is executed (S919). In this error management timer process, the value of the error effect timer for managing the error effect time set in the error effect management process (S616) is subtracted and updated. Then, after setting all interrupts to a permitted state and restoring the contents of the saved register, the effect control side timer interrupt processing is terminated, and the original processing before the occurrence of the interrupt is performed.

<<Transmission interrupt processing for image control commands>>
Next, the image control command transmission interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing image control command transmission interrupt processing. This image control command transmission interrupt process occurs at predetermined intervals (500 μs).

In this image control command transmission interrupt processing, first, the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 is checked (S931). Subsequently, a read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether or not an image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, the read pointer and the write pointer, and if the read pointer and the write pointer match, it means that the image control command is not stored. If the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area indicated by the read pointer (S934). The read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit designated as the output destination (S935). As a result, the image control command is serially transmitted to the image control board 300 from the serial port. Next, the command data (the command data transmitted at S935) is cleared (S936). Subsequently, the read pointer is incremented by 1 and updated (S937). Then, the image control command transmission interruption process is ended, and the original process before the interruption is resumed.

As described above, the main effects achieved in this embodiment can be summarized as follows. First, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by a new pseudo-continuous effect that is not merely to perform a plurality of times of pseudo-variation display, New effects different from effects, new effect display methods and control methods, new game characteristics, etc.) can further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, as a pre-performance of the pseudo continuation (true pseudo continuation performance), the false pseudo continuation performance (false pseudo continuation performance) is interrupted to make it look as if the pseudo continuation performance could be redone. By making it look as if it has been performed, it is possible to give various variations to the way of showing the pseudo-continuous fanning, so it is possible to create an unprecedented complex and diverse game production (pseudo-continuous fanning production). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in a situation where a musou-connected state with two auras is occurring, depending on whether or not the aura is used to redo the pseudo-strike (that is, musou Depending on whether or not the connected state can be maintained), the degree of expectation for success of the pseudo-continuation in the next pseudo-variation differs, so that the interest of the player is attracted to each pseudo-continuation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the pseudo continuation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, although the production mode (friend participation production pattern) of each time is different, the same production result (the same number of participants or the same number of auras possessed) is obtained as a result. In such a case, by differentiating the degree of expectation for a big hit according to the presentation mode (friend participation presentation pattern) of each time, it is possible to create an unprecedented complicated and diverse game presentation. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game performance that does not make the player feel bored, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the main variation pattern specifies the reach effect type or the number of pseudo-continues, while the main variation additional pattern specifies the number of times each element effect is executed, so that the main variation pattern and the main Based on the combination with the variation addition pattern, while suppressing the data amount of the main control board, the types of the variation pattern are substantially increased to diversify the variation of the combination of the ready-to-win performance, the pseudo-continuous performance and the element performance. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more effective presentation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the display priority between the decorative design and the reserved image is switched according to the operation state of the decorative design (variable display state/stop display state), and the Since the image with the higher priority can be preferentially viewed by the player, the display effect of the decorative pattern and the display effect of the reserved image can coexist without interfering with each other's effects. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the display sizes of the pending image and the changing image are made different from each other to achieve clear differentiation, while the common display mode (normal display mode/special display mode) is used between both images. ) to create a series of relationships and linkages from the moment the suspension occurs until it is digested (until the change display ends), so that the suspended image and the changing image can be combined. It is possible to realize a game performance (suspension change performance) that is clearly distinguished and unified as a whole, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, while each reserved image is displayed in an individual action mode for each performance stage, a certain degree of regularity is given to the action display of each reserved image to give a sense of unity of the action display. , it is possible to create a novel pending display effect that has never existed before, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the process of a series of battle productions, there is a certain degree of regularity between the match result and the game result, such as a "special jackpot" if the battle is won and a "normal jackpot" if the battle is lost. By reflecting the player's operation more flexibly in the battle production and enhancing the production effects of the battle production and the player participation type production, it is possible to create an unprecedented complex and diverse game production, As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the second special symbol big hit (so-called accident hit) occurs in the first rotation fluctuation display after the electric sapo is pulled out, the normal game is actually played even if it is one rotation. Although the state of the jackpot is interrupted by falling into the state, the production mode is made to stay in the revenge mode corresponding to the time-saving game state, and the jackpot consecutive home information is continued as it is (
By continuing the continuous state in a pseudo manner in terms of performance, it is possible to make the player recognize as if the continuous state is continuing without reducing the player's desire to play, and at the same time, the electric support is provided. The player will not feel uncomfortable with the big hit of the second special symbol after the omission, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal game state and the production mode is the special mode, even if the game standby state exceptionally continues for a predetermined time or more, the standby demonstration production (customer By prohibiting the occurrence of the waiting demo effect), even if the player intentionally interrupts the game and causes the game to wait, the current game state (normal game state, latent certain game state) can be prevented from being exposed (previous), so that the fairness of the game can be secured, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. .

In addition, according to the present embodiment, by specifying the number of executions of a plurality of types of element effects (fellow participation effect, aura connection effect, aura use effect) by one main variation addition pattern, the pattern variation effect (reach effect) is specified. It is possible to increase the variation of the combination of each element effect added to the effect, pseudo-continuous effect), suppress the data amount (storage capacity) of the main control board, and perform a wide variety of game effects during the variable display of the patterns. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of sub-variation addition patterns corresponding to one main variation addition pattern are provided, and based on the number of executions of each element effect specified by one main variation addition pattern, the sub Since the execution timing of each element effect can be different for each variable addition pattern, it is possible to perform a wide variety of game effects during the variable display of patterns while suppressing the data amount (storage capacity) of the main control board. In addition, it is possible to prevent the execution timing of each element performance from becoming monotonous and enhance the performance effect of the special performance, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when selecting a sub-variation addition pattern obtained by sub-expanding the same main variation addition pattern, selection candidates for the sub-variation addition pattern are selected according to the type of the sub-variation pattern associated with it. By making it different, it is possible to realize a wide variety of variable performances while suppressing the amount of data (storage capacity) of the main control board, and the execution of each element performance for each variable performance scenario specified by the sub-variation pattern. By making the timings different, the effects of the special effects can be enhanced, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, by making the special effects and the ready-to-win effects related to each other, the overall effect becomes unified and the player's interest is attracted to the contents of the special effects (the number of participants). As a result, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect can be further heightened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, according to the jackpot type (the number of electric sapo to be given) that triggers the transition to the suppression chance mode this time, even though the base suppression effect table is assigned, the base suppression effect table A progress pattern is defined for each variable display, and a subtraction value or an addition value is determined almost randomly within a range not exceeding an upper limit value for each progress pattern, so randomness that does not bore the player. It is possible to create a highly varied game performance, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
Next, a modified example of this embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to this modified example basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the present embodiment described above, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals. are omitted, and mainly different parts will be explained.

<Common modification 1>
In the above-described embodiment, when the result of the determination of the success or failure of the special symbol is a big hit, the normal probability variation gaming machine that determines the presence or absence of the probability variation transition based on the stop symbol (jackpot symbol) of the special symbol is adopted. It is not limited, and if the result of the success/failure determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the presence or absence of probability change transition is determined according to whether or not the game ball enters the specific area during execution of the big win game V A probability variation game machine may be adopted. Further, as a modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, the probability variation gaming state that is given as a trigger to become a big hit with the first special symbol or the second special symbol within the limit of the preset limit number of times (upper limit number of times) Alternatively, a gaming machine having a limiter function for limiting the number of consecutive times of the latent probability variable gaming state may be employed. Further, in the above embodiment, the special symbol probability variation function is configured as a normal probability variable machine that continues from after the end of the big win game until the next big hit occurs, but the special symbol probability variation function is the specified number of STs. (For example, 100 times) it may be configured as a constant variable machine that operates continuously.

<Common Modification 2>
In the above embodiment, a model with only one big winning hole installed in the game area has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a model with multiple big winning holes installed in the game area may be applied. may In addition, when adopting a model equipped with a plurality of large winning openings, the above-mentioned V probability variation gaming machine has a specific area (probability variation function operating area, V area) that triggers the operation of the probability variation function of special symbols Two or more large winning openings, that is, a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening that does not have this specific area (probability variation function operating area, V area) may be installed. As an example of the board layout, the first and second large winning slots may be arranged substantially vertically or horizontally in the right area of the game area, or the first large winning slots may be arranged. The board area where the lottery is placed and the board area where the second big winning hole is arranged may be different areas. In that case, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the first big prize hole (number of unit prize balls) and the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the second big prize hole The number of awarded balls (unit number of awarded balls) may be the same or different. In addition, of the two big winning openings, the first big winning opening (or second big winning opening) is a big winning opening for small winning games, and the second big winning opening (or first big winning opening) is for big winning games. It may be configured as a large winning opening. In that case, the number of prize balls (number of unit prize balls) in the big prize opening for the small winning game may be set to 10, and the number of prize balls (number of unit prize balls) in the big prize opening for the big hit game may be set to 15, etc. good.

<Common modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, among the plurality of game states, the latent probability variable game state is defined as a game state in which the special symbol probability variation function operates and the special symbol variation time reduction function and electric chew support function do not operate. However, it is not limited to this, and the latent probability variable gaming state is defined as a gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function and special symbol variation time reduction function are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. good too. In addition, the special symbol variation time shortening function is divided into the first special symbol variation time shortening function and the second special symbol variation time shortening function, and the latent probability variable gaming state is changed to the special symbol probability variation function and the second special symbol variation time shortening function. It may be defined as a game state in which the variable time shortening function of 2 special symbols is activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. In addition, even if the electric chew support function operates in synchronization with the special symbol variation time reduction function (second special symbol variation time reduction function), the special symbol variation time reduction function (second special symbol variation time reduction function) shortening function).

Next, in order to facilitate a clearer understanding of the technical significance of the present embodiment and modifications, problems associated with the above embodiments and modifications will be outlined.

Conventional pachinko game machines are known to execute so-called pseudo-continuous effects, in which one-time variable display of decorative symbols that show the result of the win-or-fail judgment is shown as a plurality of pseudo-variable displays. (See, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-50700).

In conventional pachinko gaming machines, prior to the execution of the winning/failure determination, a preliminary determination is made for the undigested operation pending ball, a pending image based on the result of this preliminary determination is displayed, and the pending image is displayed according to the display mode. It is known that a so-called pending change effect is executed, which suggests the possibility of hitting a big hit (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-213021).

In conventional pachinko machines, when the variable display mode of decorative patterns becomes a so-called ready-to-win state, it is developed into a ready-to-win effect such as a battle effect, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the result of the ready-to-win effect. Suggestions are known (see, for example, JP-A-2012-85669).

Conventional pachinko game machines are known to have multiple types of production modes, and to execute variable production of decorative symbols under a background image according to the type of production mode currently being executed (for example, See Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-54122).

Conventional pachinko gaming machines are known to execute a customer waiting demonstration effect (so-called standby demonstration effect) when the game standby state continues for a predetermined time or more (for example, "JP 2013- 111115").

Conventional pachinko game machines are known to have a large number of variation patterns in order to increase variations such as reach effects and pseudo-continuous effects (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-230714). ).

In conventional pachinko machines, in conjunction with the variable display of decorative patterns, there are those that execute reach effects and advance notice effects that pre-notify the high degree of expectation for the transition to special games (expectation for big hits). known (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-16106).

However, since there are already many pachinko game machines adopting such a configuration as conventional models, there is a need to further improve the entertainment of games in order to differentiate them from conventional machines. .

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment and modified example, the configuration as described above is adopted for the purpose of improving the amusement of the game, and the effects described above are achieved.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be modified as appropriate without departing from the gist of the present invention. In addition, an appropriate combination of the constituent elements described in the above embodiments and modifications, or part of the constituent elements described in the above embodiments and modifications are deleted or converted by well-known and commonly used techniques, etc. It is also included in the scope of the present invention.

PM pachinko game machine PA game area PA1 left area PA2 right area 1 outer frame 2 front frame 5 glass frame 15 effect button 20 game board 51 first start port 52 second start port 53 operation gate 54 big winning port 70 effect display device 71 1st special symbol display device 72 2nd special symbol display device 100 main control board 200 production control board 220 production control means 300 image control board 400 payout control board 500 power supply board 600 external information terminal board 511 first starting port switch 521 second Starting port switch 541 Big winning port switch 710 Suspended image display area 720 Changing image display area

Claims (1)

a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided in the game area and allowing a game ball to enter;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a predetermined random number value triggered by the entry of a game ball into the starting port;
success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a success/failure random number value among the predetermined random number values acquired by the random number acquisition means;
Variation pattern determination means for performing a main variation pattern lottery for determining a main variation pattern based on the main variation pattern random number value among the predetermined random number values acquired by the random number acquisition means;
A symbol display device in which a special symbol indicating the result of the success/failure determination is variably displayed and statically displayed based on the main variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means;
special game execution means capable of shifting to a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit;
an effect display device for displaying a predetermined effect;
and an effect determination means for determining the effect to be displayed on the effect display device,
performing a main variation addition pattern lottery for determining the main variation addition pattern based on the main variation addition pattern random number value among the predetermined random number values obtained by the random number obtaining means;
The basic fluctuation time of the special symbol is specified by the main fluctuation pattern,
The variation addition time of the special symbol is specified by the main variation addition pattern,
The variable display time of the special symbol is configured to be a total time of the basic variable time of the special symbol specified by the main variation pattern and the variable addition time of the special symbol specified by the main variation additional pattern. cage,
During the variable display of the special symbols corresponding to the determined main variation pattern and the main variation additional pattern, a special effect corresponding to the main variation additional pattern is executed,
Multiple types of ready-to-win effect selection candidates are associated with a predetermined main variation pattern,
According to the type of main variation addition pattern, any one of the special effects having a plurality of types of display modes can be executed,
It is configured so that a ready-to-win effect corresponding to the display mode of the special effect can be executed,
Determining a sub-variation pattern and a sub-variation addition pattern corresponding to the combination of the main variation pattern determined in the main variation pattern lottery and the main variation addition pattern determined in the main variation addition pattern lottery,
It is possible to execute a production corresponding to the sub-variation pattern and the sub-variation addition pattern,
A plurality of sub-variation patterns are associated with a certain main variation pattern and/or a certain main variation additional pattern, and one of the plurality of sub-variation patterns is determined,
A plurality of sub-variation addition patterns are associated with a certain main variation pattern and/or a certain main variation addition pattern, and one of the plurality of sub-variation addition patterns is determined. A pachinko game machine characterized by :

Images